Home

User Manual - Parallels Plesk Panel

1. Hour and Minute within the valid value range indicated in each item Web Interface To configure Time in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Management gt Time 2 Specify the Time parameter 3 Click Apply Figure 7 2 1 The time configuration Time Configuration Time Configuration Clock Source Use Local Settings M System Date 2011 01 01 01 04 59 yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone Configuration Time Zone None M Acronym 0 16 characters Daylight Saving Time Configuration Daylight Saving Time Disabled et Start Time settings Month ten l Date 1 il Year 2000 Hours fa Minutes a w End Time settings Month PEA Date L w Year eed Hours se Minutes e Offset settings Offset i 1 1440 Minutes e a User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 295 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Parameter description Time Configuration Clock Source There are two modes for configuring how the Clock Source from Select Use Local Settings Clock Source from Local Time Select Use NTP Server Clock Source from NTP Server System Date Displays the current time of the system The year of system date limits between 2011 and 2037 Time Zone Configuration Time Zone Lists various Time Zones worldwide Select an appropriate Time Zone from the drop down and click Apply to set Acronym User can set the acronym of the time zone This is a User configurable acronym to identify the time
2. User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 20 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 1 3 NTP NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time based Greenwich Mean Time GMT If use the NTP mode and select a built in NTP time server or manually specify an user defined NTP server as well as Time Zone the switch will sync the time in a short after pressing lt Apply gt button Though it synchronizes the time automatically the precondition is that the switch must have the access to Internet Time Zone is an offset time off GMT You have to select the time zone first and then perform time sync via NTP because the switch will combine this time zone offset and updated NTP time to come out the local time otherwise you will not able to get the correct time The switch supports configurable time zone from 12 to 13 step 1 hour Default Time zone 8 Hrs Web Interface To configure NTP in the web interface 1 Click Configuration System NTP 2 Specify the Time parameter in manual parameters 3 Click Apply Figure 3 1 3 The NTP configuration NTP Configuration Home NTP Mode Disabled M Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4 Server 5 Parameter description Mode Indicates the NTP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable NTP client mode operation Disabled Disable NTP client mode operation Server l1to5 Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as
3. You can click them for refresh the DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification information by manual User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 168 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 16 9 DSCP Translation The section describes the swtich allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation settings for all switches DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress Web Interface To configure the DSCP Translation parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the Ingress Translate and Egress Remap DPO and Remap DP1 Parameters 3 Evoke to enable or disable Classify 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 9 The DSCP Translation Configuration DSCP Translation Home DSCP Translation Ingress Egress DSCP Translate Classify Remap DPO Remap DP1 gt M L x O BE o BE M o BE M o BE M 1 1 M O M 1 M 2 gt M o gt M gt M 61 61 y C 61 M 61 bd 62 62 M E 62 M 62 63 63 C 63 M 63 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 169 WWWEVIVerT ak co m Parameter description DSCP Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63 Ingress Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS class and DPL map There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Tr
4. Clear Clears the counters for all ports User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 194 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 4 3 3 QCL Status The section will let you know how to configure and shows the QCL status by different QCL users Each row describes the QCE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Web Interface To display the QoS Control List Status in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Ports then QCL Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Scroll to select the combined static Voice VLAN and conflict 4 To Click the Refresh to refresh an entry of the MVR Statistics Information Figure 4 3 3 The QoS Control List Status QoS Control List Status Home QCL status Auto refresh EJ Combined M Action Frame User QCE Port Type CoS DPL DSCP Conflict No entries Parameter description User Indicates the QCL user QCE Indicates the index of QCE Frame Type Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed LLC Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames Port Indicates the list of ports co
5. Monitor v FD2134 80M FD 134 s 192 168 40 32 gt Traffic Chart 70M 1P8362 gt Instant Throughput 60M 192 168 40 93 s 50M a Diagnostics lt IP amp 161 40M Mega Pixel Network Camera 192 168 40 18 amp Maintenance lt 30M MD8531H 20M Sg Mega Pixel Network Camera 192 168 40 101 has 7 E OM 180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 325 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm Surveillance Diagnostics 11 1 Device Status In this page you can troubleshoot the connection between PoE switch and IP Devices This feature is designed primarily for administrators to verify and test the link routes between the switch and the IP device Note that the topology of network needs to be saved for this function to work properly Web interface To configure Surveillance Information in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Diagnostics gt and Device Status 2 Select a device s checkbox and click the Start button to start the connectivity test 3 Click Another Try to go back to the Device Status screen Figure 11 1 1 Device Status Device Status eHome Diagnostics gt Device Status Start irom MAC address oococo 00 00 00 with 20 entries per pape Status Model Name Device Name MAC IP Address Version C Online IP8337H IPF8337H O0 02 di 27 b2 98 192 168 0 6 l la Online PO8136 00 02 d1 28 66 92 197 168 0 20 02006 L Online IPRI64 IPS364 00 02 d1 28 72 e7 192 168 0 5 Di la _ Online FOS
6. To optimize the display effect we recommend you using the below browser and OS combinations Chrome Chrome FireFox v 39 E11 IE10 IE9 IE8 after v 39 Before v38 No w No No Yes Yes No No No YES _ _Yes_ NO al NO NOTE The PoE switch and all cameras attached must be configured in the same subnet Otherwise the Surveillance related functions will not apply You can let the PoE switch be a DHCP client listening to a DHCP server for IP assignment or enable its onboard DHCP server User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 15 WWW viv OTEK COM Switch System Configuration This chapter describes the entire basic configuration tasks which includes the System Information and any manage of the Switch e g Time Account IP Syslog and NTP 3 1 System You can identify the system by configuring the contact information name and location of the switch 3 1 1 Information The switch system s contact information is provided here Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface 1 Click Configuration System and Information 2 Write System Contact System Name System Location information in this page 3 Click Apply Figure 3 1 1 System Information O AW GEV 2644 185 x e gt C N 192 168 1 1 Yviverk AW GEV 264A4 185 System Information Switch Surveillance Model Name AW GEV 264A 185 Management lt System Description 24xGE PoE 2xGE Combo SFP VivoCa
7. User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 175 6 IPv6 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm NOTE All frame types are explained below 1 Any Allow all types of frames 2 Ethernet Ethernet Type Valid ethernet type can have value within Ox600 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any 3 LLC SSAP Address Valid SSAP Source Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any DSAP Address Valid DSAP Destination Service Access Point can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any Control Address Valid Control Address can vary from 0x00 to OxFF or Any the default value is Any 4 SNAP PID Valid PID a k a ethernet type can have value within Ox00 OxFFFF or Any default value is Any 5 IPv4 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP Specific Source IP address in value mask format or Any IP and Mask are in the format x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 When Mask is converted to a 32 bit binary string and read from left to right all bits following the first zero must also be zero DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option yes no jany Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protoc
8. 1 Click Monitor _LDP then click EEE to show discover EEE devices 2 Click Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 4 10 4 The LLDP Neighbors EEE information LLDP Neighbors EEE Information Home EEE Auto refresh _ 6 Local Port TxTw RxTw Fallback Receive Tw Echo Tx Tw Echo Rx Tw Resolved Tx Tw Resolved Rx Tw EEE in Sync No LLDP EEE information found EEE function then the table will show No LLDP EEE information found Note If your network without any devices which enables Parameter description Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted TX Tw The link partner s maximum time that transmit path can hold off sending data after reassertion of LPI Rx TW The link partner s time that receiver would like the transmitter to hold off to allow time for the receiver to wake from sleep Fallback Receive Tw The link partner s fallback receive Tw A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx Since a receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings this provides the transmitter with additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation Systems that do not implement this option default the value to be the same as that of the Receive Tw_sys_ 1x Echo Tx Tw The link partner s Echo Tx Tw value The respective echo values shall be defined as the l
9. Host the pool services for a specific DHCP client identified by client identifier or hardware address User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 35 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com lf is displayed it means not defined Display network number of the DHCP address pool lf is displayed it means not defined e Subnet Mask Display subnet mask of the DHCP address pool lf is displayed it means not defined Lease Time Display lease time of the pool Buttons Add New Pool Click to add a new DHCP pool Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 36 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 4 2 Snooping DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server The section describes to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch The DHCP Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network Web Interface To configure DHCP snooping in the web interface Click Configuration DHCP Snooping Select Enabled in the Mode of DHCP Snooping Configuration Select Trusted of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration Click Apply AUNE Figure 3 4 2 The DHCP Snooping Configuration DHCP Snooping Configuration H
10. PoE Port Configuration Port PoE Mode Priority Maximum Power W fi v lt gt y 15 4 Parameter description Power Supply Configuration Reserved Power determined by There are three modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power 1 Allocated mode In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve The allocated reserved power for each port PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields 2 Class mode In this mode each port automatically determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to and reserves the power accordingly Four different port classes exist and one for 4 7 15 4 or 30 Watts In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect 3 LLDP MED mode This mode is similar to the Class mode expect that each port determine the amount power it reserves by exchanging PoE information using the LLDP protocol and reserves power accordingly If no LLDP information is available for a port the port will reserve power using the class modeln this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect For all modes If a port uses more power than the reserved power for the port the port is shut down Power Management Mode There are 2 modes for configuring when to shut down the ports 1 Actual Consumption In this mode the ports are shut down when the actual power consumption for all ports exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver or if
11. The switch port number LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Backup means that the port could not join the aggregation group but will join if other port leaves Meanwhile it s LACP Status is disabled Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together e lt AggrID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs Partner System ID The partner s System ID MAC address Partner Port The partner s port number connected to this port User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 237 WWW VvIVvoTeK comMm Partner Prio The partner s port priority Buttons Auto refresh _ gt Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 238 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm 4 6 3 Port Statistics This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a Port Statistics overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Monitor LACP Port Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Statistics Figure 4 6 3 The LACP
12. VIVOTEK WWW Viv OT EK C O M AW GEV 264A Series L2 Managed PoE Switch User Manual Rev 1 2 For firmware revision 0116 Copyright VIVOTEK Inc 2015 All rights reserved All brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm About This Manual Copyright Copyright 2014 VIVOTEK Inc All rights reserved The products and programs described in this User s Manual are licensed products of VIVOTEK Inc This User s Manual contains proprietary information protected by copyright and this User s Manual and all accompanying hardware software and documentation are copyrighted No parts of this User s manual may be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable from by any means by electronic or mechanical Including photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use and without the prior express written permission of VIVOTEK Inc Purpose This manual gives specific information on how to operate and use the management functions of the AW GEV 264A Audience The Manual is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for operating and maintaining network equipment consequently it assumes a basic working knowledge of general switch functions the Internet Protocol IP and Simple Network Management Protocol
13. XXRP 5 v 10 5 v 10 Y Parameter description Group Name The name identifying the privilege group In most cases a privilege level group consists of a single module e g LACP RSTP or QoS but a few of them contains more than one The following description defines these privilege level groups in details System Contact Name Location Timezone Daylight Saving Time Log Security Authentication System Access Management Port contains Dot1x port MAC based and the MAC Address Limit ACL HTTPS SSH ARP Inspection IP source guard User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 41 IP Everything except ping Port Everything except VeriPHY Diagnostics ping and VeriPHY Maintenance CLI System Reboot System Restore Default System Password Configuration Save Configuration Load and Firmware Load Web Users Privilege Levels and everything in Maintenance Debug Only present in CLI Privilege Levels Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups configuration read only configuration execute read write status statistics read only status statistics read write e g for clearing of statistics User Privilege should be same or greater than the authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 42
14. 1 2 Aug 2015 142 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 14 2 Port Isolation Port Isolation provides for an apparatus and method to isolate ports on layer 2 switches on the same VLAN to restrict traffic flow The apparatus comprises a switch having said plurality of ports each port configured as a protected port or a non protected port An address table memory stores an address table having a destination address and port number pair A forwarding map generator generates a forwarding map which is responsive to a destination address of a data packet The method for isolating ports on a layer 2 switch comprises configuring each of the ports on the layer 2 switch as a protected port or a non protected port A destination address on an data packet is matched with a physical address on said layer 2 switch and a forwarding map is generated for the data packet based upon the destination address on the data packet The data packet is then sent to the plurality of ports pursuant to the forwarding map generated based upon whether the ingress port was configured as a protected or non protected port This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN A port member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN Web Interface To configure Port Isolation configuration in the web interface 1 Click Private VLAN Port Isolation 2 Evoke which port want to enable Port Isolation 3 Click Apply F
15. A CoS of O zero has the lowest priority If the port is VLAN aware the frame is tagged and Tag Class is enabled then the frame is classified to a CoS that is mapped from the PCP and DEI value in the tag Otherwise the frame is classified to the default CoS The classified CoS can be overruled by a QCL entry Note If the default CoS has been dynamically changed then the actual default CoS is shown in parentheses after the configured default CoS DPL Controls the default drop precedence level All frames are classified to a drop precedence level If the port is VLAN aware the frame is tagged and Tag Class is enabled then the frame is classified to a DPL that is mapped from the PCP and DEI value in the tag Otherwise the frame is classified to the default DPL The classified DPL can be overruled by a QCL entry PCP Controls the default PCP value All frames are classified to a PCP value If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged then the frame is classified to the PCP value in the tag Otherwise the frame is classified to the default PCP value DEI Controls the default DEI value All frames are classified to a DEI value If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged then the frame is classified to the DEI value in the tag Otherwise the frame is classified to the default DEI value Tag Class Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port Disabled Use default QoS cl
16. Allowed Access VLANs Ethertype for Custom S ports Port VLAN Configuration Port Port Mode VLAN Port Type bs 1 1 Access V 1 2 Access Y 1 22 Access 23 Access V 25 26 Access Y Parameter description Global VLAN Configuration Existing VLANs Ingress Filtering Acceptance Ingress Tagged and Ur Egress Tagging This field shows the VLANs that are created on the switch By default only VLAN 1 exists More VLANs may be created by using a list syntax where the individual elements are separated by commas Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and upper bound Home VLANs Allowed Forbidden VLANs VLANs The following example will create VLANs 1 10 11 12 13 200 and 300 1 10 13 200 300 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 137 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters Ethertype for Custom S ports This field specifies the ethertype TPID specified in hexadecimal used for Custom S ports The setting is in force for all ports whose Port Type is set to S Custom Port Port VLAN Configuration Port This is the logical port number of this row Mode The port mode default is Access determines the fundamental behavior of the port in question A port can be in one of three modes as described below Whenever a particular mode is selected the remaining fields in that row will be either grayed out or made
17. Aug 2015 299 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com General Network Setting P8152 Device Name Mega Pixel Network Camera Auto Configuration DHCP Y IP Address 192 168 1 2 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 253 Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server Root password Confirm Root password Parameter description Select Use the checkbox in the Select column to Remove Reboot or restore the Default of a device Status Device link state On Off Line Model Name Camera amp Encoder model name Device Name Camera amp Encoder device name Edit Device Name Camera amp Encoder device name edit MAC Camera amp Encoder device MAC address It is also a hyper link that opens the device s General Network Setting page IP Address Camera amp Encoder device IP address It is also a hyper link that opens a web session with the device where you can configure the device firmware options IP State Dynamic IP or Static IP Version Camera amp Encoder device s firmware version e Root Password Change the camera amp Encoder Root Password 1 12 characters Confirm Password Confirm the camera and Encoder Root Password 1 12 characters User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 300 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm Functional buttons Figure 7 4 2 Surveillance Information The connection status is shown by an interactive front view PoE ports shown in orange indicate the ports connected t
18. E y M gt M 32768 1 Auto M Active M Fast M 32768 2 C Auto M Active M Fast M 32768 3 C Auto M Active V Fast V 32768 23 Auto M Active N Fast M 32768 24 Auto Y Active V ast M 76 25 i Auto bd Active hd Fas N 768 26 C Auto M Active M Fast M 768 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 99 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Parameter description Port The switch port number LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner speak if spoken to Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions Fast will transmit LACP packets each second while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet Prio The Prio controls the priority of the port If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter wil
19. Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row O Moves the ACE up the list QX Moves the ACE down the list amp Deletes the ACE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings MAC Parameter SMAC Filter Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears SMAC Value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format iS XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX xX is a hexadecimal digit A frame that hits this ACE matches User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 82 WWW Vv
20. Groupi Desc ddiddidddd E amp Y vid G IBST38 H gt 169 254 163 118 Oe E7 IBE33B H 185 254 193 238 sre174 ie 102 180 1 7 HM gi Piwel Network Cameri sey 152 160 1 7 Type Device Name FOG182 Medel Hame Hegt Pte Netevork Camere ag j 152 168 1 4 iE PoE Stats 10216811 E p an 169 254 1 18 a 169 254 244 312 port 17 SE 168 254 2305 port 76 C E 192 168 1254 A VLAN can also span across multiple switches Select devices on multiple switches to join them into the same VLAN They will be automatically tagged into a VLAN switch ipcam amp Encoder 9 nvR PIP Device 9 cms 3 a l rdin witch lt gt Subo dinate switc _ _ Mega Pixel Network GEV 264A 185 E 192 168 6 160 v IB6338 H 192 168 6 130 P Port 14 VLAN 1 ae Port 25 Port 26 Mega Pixel Network 192 168 6 161 Port 18 Mega Pixel Network Lael l AD 122 168 6 238 2 oy Port 25 Root switch AW GEV 2644 185 192 168 6 149 BES FE8191 192 168615 L 122 168 6281 Port 3 f Port 25 MI I l l j ipesezet 192 168 6 207 i ADL 192 168 6 226 por A Port 25 j f f f I User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 314 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm You can use the device menu to select or deselect the types of device information on screen e g MAC address or Device Name Note that only 3 types of information can be displayed at one time
21. IP Pool Starting address Size of Pool Apply DHCP Server Setting If you want to enable the embedded DHCP server deselect the I Pv4 DHCP Enable Client checkbox The DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol default is disabled If you join the switch into an established network make sure the DHCP server is disabled For an unmanaged network you can enable the DHCP server function and let it manage the IP addresses of devices attached to the switch A I MPORTANT i If you attach the PoE switch to a network that is already managed by a DHCP server IP conflicts will occur You should then disable the onboard DHCP server first 2 If you have a 264A switch up and running and enabled its DHCP function you should disable the DHCP server on another 264A PoE switch if you need to join it to your network Multiple 264A switches can be managed in the same network using a Master slave configuration Therefore except the Master Root switch disable the Surveillance state function on other PoE switches IP Pool Starting address The starting address of IPv4 address for the interface VLANI e g 192 168 x x Size of Pool The IPv4 network size can be a number starting from 1 to 254 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 294 VIVOTEK WW VIVOTERK coO 7 2 Time The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP Manual setting is simple and you just input Year Month Day
22. Info v Info v Info v Warning Y Warning Y Warning Y Info v Info id Warning Y Home Trap Event Severity Every group has an severity level The following level types are supported lt 0 gt Information Information messages lt 1 gt Warning Warning conditions lt 2 gt Error Error conditions User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 58 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm 3 5 1 7 RMON An RMON implementation typically operates in a client server model Monitoring devices contain RMON software agents that collect information and analyze packets These probes act as servers and the Network Management applications that communicate with them act as clients 3 5 1 7 1 Statistics Configure RMON Statistics table on this page The entry index key is ID Web Interface To display the configure RMON configuration in the web interface 1 Click RMON Statistics 2 Click Add New Entry 3 Specify the ID parameters 4 Click Apply Figure 3 5 1 7 1 The RMON Statics Configuration RMON Statistics Configuration Home Statistics Delete ID Data Source Add New Entry RMON Statistics Configuration Home Statistics Delete ID Data Source 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 0 Add New Entry Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the RMON Statistics Configuration page Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 6
23. Select the starting day Month Select the starting month Hours Select the starting hour Minutes Select the starting minute End time settings Week Select the ending week number Day Select the ending day Month Select the ending month Hours Select the ending hour Minutes Select the ending minute Offset settings Offset Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time Range 1 to 1440 Note The under Start Time Settings and End Time Settings was displayed what you set on the Start Time Settings and End Time Settings field information Buttons These buttons are displayed on the NTP page Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 24 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 1 5 Log The log is a standard for logging program messages It allows separation of the software that generates messages from the system that stores them and the software that reports and analyzes them It can be used as well a generalized informational analysis and debugging messages It is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple platforms Web Interface To configure log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration System and log 2 Specify the syslog parameters include IP Address of Syslog server and Port number 3 Evoke the Syslog to enable
24. Surveillance Working Status The current switch working condition System Date The current system date and time zone System Uptime How long has the system been operating Surveillance State Displays whether the Surveillance mode has been activated see previous pages for details Device Scan Range See previous pages for details Device Scan Starting I P Address In the Manual mode enter a starting address for the address scan e g 192 168 1 1 Device Scan Ending IP Address In the Manual mode enter an end address for the address scan e g 192 168 4 254 QoS Enable Select to enable or disable the QoS setting for mission critical video QoS Class Select the priority for the QoS setting 7 has the highest priority IP Setting I Pv4 DHCP Enable Enables the DHCP client mode setting for listening to a DHCP server in the local network I Pv4 Address The IPv4 address of the interface VLANI Subnet mask The IPv4 network mask of the interface VLAN1 DNS Server Select the source of DNS service 1 From any DHCP interfaces as provided by a router offering the DHCP service 2 No DNS server 3 Configured User defined 4 From this DHCP interface If a router exists in a specific VLAN configuration listen to the particular router for the DNS service DNS Proxy Select this checkbox if access to the DNS server is made via a Proxy User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 293 DHCP Server Setting DHCP Server Disabled vY
25. The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors OutQLen The length of the output packet queue in packets Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are Absolute Get the sample directly Delta Calculate the difference between samples default Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period Startup Alarm The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are Rising Trigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold Falling Trigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold RisingOrFallingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or less than the falling threshold default Rising Threshold Rising threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 Rising Index Rising event index 1 65535 Falling Threshold Falling threshold value 2147483648 2147483647 Falling Index Falling event index 1 65535 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 63 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm 3 5 1 7 4 Event Configure RMON Event table on this page The entry index key is ID Web Interface To display the configure RMON Event in the web interface 1 Click RMON Event 2 Click Add New Entry 3 Specify the ID parameters 4 Cl
26. describes a QCE that is defined The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new QCE to the list Web Interface To configure the QoS Control List parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS QoS Contol List 2 Click the to add a new QoS Control List 3 Scroll all parameters and evoke the Port Member to join the QCE rules 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 11 The QoS Control List Configuration QoS Control List Configuration QCE Port DMAC QCE Configuration Port Members 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Tag Type 10 11 Home Action Frame VID PCP DEI Type CoS DPL Home QoS Control List DSCP QoS Contr l List 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 21 22 23 244 2 126 DMAC SMAC Tag VID PCP DEI Frame Type Any M Any M Any M an M Any Any Any M User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 173 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm Action Parameters CoS 0 N DPL Default DSCP Default v Parameter description QCE Indicates the index of QCE Port Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE DMAC Indicates the destination MAC address Possible values are Any Match any DMAC Unicast Match unicast DMAC Multicast Match multicast DMAC Broadcast Match broadcast
27. e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch D 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds Buckets Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 50 G Buckets Granted User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 61 WWW VvIVvoTeK comMm The number of data shall be saved in the RMON 3 5 1 7 3 Alarm Configure RMON Alarm table on this page The entry index key is ID Web Interface To display the configure RMON Alarm in the web interface 1 Click RMON Alarm 2 Click Add New Entry 3 Specify the ID parameters 4 Click Apply Figure 3 5 1 7 3 The RMON Alarm Configuration RMON Alarm Configuration Home Alarm Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling Delete ID Interval Variable Type Value Alarm Threshold Index Threshold Index Add New Entry RMON Alarm Configuration Blome Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling Delete ID Interval Variable Type Value Alarm Threshold Index Threshold index 13 6 1 2 12 2 1 0 Dela 0 Risingorfalling Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the RMON
28. 0 0 0 0 Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview IP Address Status 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled Parameter description eo F The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server State The current state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 221 WWW Vat SKk oSom Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled RADIUS Accounting Servers eo Ff The RADIUS server number Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server IP Address The IP address and UDP port number in lt IP Address gt lt UDP Port gt notation of this server State The cur
29. 01 01T01 41 06 00 00 System Uptime 01 41 06 Bootloader Version v1 15a Firmware Version v6 04 2014 12 04 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 183 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK comMm Hardware Version v1 01 Mechanical Version v1 01 MAC Address 00 02 d1 40 c7 89 Memory Total 83166 KBytes Free 61553 KBytes Max 61419 KBytes FLASH 0x40000000 0x41ffffff 512 x 0x10000 blocks Parameter description e Model Name Displays the factory defined model name for identification purpose System Description Displays the system description Location The system location configured in Configuration System Information System Location Contact The system contact configured in Configuration System Information System Contact Platform Name Displays the user defined system name that configured in System System Information Configuration System Name System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the Timing server running on the switch if any System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational Bootloader Version Displays the current boot loader version number Firmware Version The software version of this switch Hardware Mechanical Version The hardware and mechanical version of this switch Series Number The serial number of this switch MAC Address The MAC Address of this switch Memory Displays the memory size of the system FLASH Displays the flash size of the s
30. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 ID Address Length ID Currently no entries present Add New Entry Parameter description Delete To delete a IP subnet based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted on the selected switch in the stack VCEID Indicates the index of the entry It is user configurable It s value ranges from 0 128 Ifa VCE ID is 0 application will auto generate the VCE ID for that entry Deletion and lookup of IP subnet based VLAN are based on VCE ID IP Address Indicates the IP address Mask Length Indicates the network mask length e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet based VLAN entry To include a port in a IP subnet based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked e Adding a New IP subnet based VLAN Click Add New Entry to add a new IP subnet based VLAN entry An empty row is added to User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 149 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK com the table and the IP subnet based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any IP address mask can be configured for the IP subnet based VLAN entry Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The IP subnet based VLAN entry is
31. 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users Delete User Delete the current user This button is not available for new configurations Add new user User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 40 WWW VvIVvoTeK comMm 3 5 1 2 Privilege Level This page provides an overview of the privilege levels The switch provides user set Account Aggregation Diagnostics EEE GARP GVRP IP IPMC Snooping LACP LLDP LLDP MED MAC Table MRP MVR MVRP Maintenance Mirroring POE Ports Private VLANs QoS SMTP SNMP Security Spanning Tree System Trap Event VCL VLANs Voice VLAN Privilege Levels from 1 to 15 Web Interface To configure Privilege Level in the web interface 1 Click SYSTEM Account Privilege Level 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Apply Figure 3 5 1 2 The Privilege Level configuration Privilege Level Configuration Home Privilege Levels Privilege Levels Configuration Configuration Execute Status Statistics Status Statistics Group Name Read only Read write Read only Read write ACTIVATE sv 10 V 5 v 10 V Aggregation 5 M 10 V 5 E 10 V cloud_management 5 M 10 V 5 Iv 10 V Debug 15M 15N 15N 15 V VLANs 5 v 10 y 5 v 10 Voice_VLAN 5 M 10 5 v 10 VTUN 5 v 10 y 5 iv 10
32. 1057 and can relay IEEE 802 frames via any method LLDP MED Endpoint Device Definition LLDP MED Endpoint Devices as defined in TIA 1057 are located at the IEEE 802 LAN network edge and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP MED framework Within the LLDP MED Endpoint Device category the LLDP MED scheme is broken into further Endpoint Device Classes as defined in the following Each LLDP MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined for the previous Endpoint Device Class For example will any LLDP MED Endpoint Device User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 251 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK comMm claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint Class Il also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to Generic Endpoints Class and any LLDP MED Endpoint Device claiming compliance as a Communication Device Class III will also support all aspects of TIA 1057 applicable to both Media Endpoints Class Il and Generic Endpoints Class 1 LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class I The LLDP MED Generic Endpoint Class definition is applicable to all endpoint products that require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA 1057 however do not support IP media or act as an end user communication appliance Such devices may include but are not limited to IP Communication Controllers other communication related servers or any device requiring basic services as defined in TIA 1057 Discovery services d
33. 2 Aug 2015 WWWEVIiVva tT S Kk oaom 132 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 11 4 Auto Checking This page allows the user to specify the auto detection parameters to check the linking status between PoE ports and PDs When it detected the fail connect will reboot remote PD automatically Web Interface To Display Power Over Ethernet Auto Checking in the web interface 1 Click Configuration PoE and Auto checking 2 Enable the Ping Check function 3 Specify the PD s IP address checking interval retry time failure action and reboot time 4 Click Apply to apply the change Figure 3 11 2 The PoE Scheduling PoE Auto Checking Home Auto Checking Ping Check Disable v Port Ping IP Address Start up Time Interval Time sec Retry Time Failure Log Failure Action Power OFF Time sec 1 0 0 0 0 30 3 0 error 0 total 0 Nothing v NaN 2 0 0 0 0 30 3 0 error 0 total 0 Nothing v NaN 22 0 0 0 0 30 3 0 error 0 total 0 Nothing v NaN 23 0 0 0 0 30 3 0 error 0 total 0 Nothing v NaN 24 0 0 0 0 30 3 0 error 0 total 0 Nothing v NaN Parameter description Power Supply Configuration Ping Check Enable Ping Check function can detects the connection between PoE port and power device Disable will turn off the detection Port This is the logical port number for this row Ping IP Address The PD s IP Address the system should ping Start up Time sec When PD has been start up the Switch will wait Start
34. 3 C 500 kbps M C C 500 kbps W E 5 C 500 kbps W C 6 C 500 kbps W C 7 E 500 kbps Y C Port Shaper Enable Rate Unit E 500 kbps v User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 159 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Home Port Scheduler Port Port 1 W Scheduler Mode Weighted A Queue Shaper Queue Scheduler Queue Enable Rate Unit If you select the scheduler O 500 v mode with wighted then the screen will change as Q L 500 kbps the figure 1 C 500 kbps M C 2 C 500 kbps M p 17 17 3 500 kbps Y E 17 17 500 kbps M 17 17 gt C 500 kbps M 17 17 6 C 500 kbps M E 7 C 500 kbps N C Port Shaper Enable Rate Unit B 500 kbps v Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port Shapers Qn Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate e g 800 Mbps Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is rest
35. 4o22 RADIUS DE AlS sirsiran a a rn en ee ene eee eon eee 223 Py SIUC E N sissies E A E N sais ea awn one A A A ord nar E E E E A T E A 228 ARON en a E A E E E A E E E teens deeesane eee 228 AG UNC P A E A EEA caden nee seesace 236 u S SV SC Meo el e E EA E A E E A E E E EA EE 236 Aao S PO S CNG 5 a EA E AT NE AAE AE 239 A 7 LOOP Protecti ONiccrsreriip nin EAE ecutcanscancansanauseneuinasuecbunaes ecesuayneneeenes 241 AS SO AA WSS e A O E E E E EE E AT E A E A 242 Ae ES EEEE EA E AE E EO 242 OCS P I EE E E A E E N E A EE E E EE E E E 243 ee OI SEUNG Ea E acne T E E A casts E E E T A E E A A T 244 ORIG aaor E E E E E eit nee 245 ag GIVI SNO OPINE era E E A A E TE 245 ra E E ANS EE E E E AE AE E E E EE 245 4 9 12 Group INFOMATION serana EET EO Enn ERAN E EE EENEN 247 ARVO LLDP cicirine 249 AO NEEND Ol oinnes eE AE EE E AE EEE TE 249 ALI POR scerna A 260 A MAC TIDI orron EO 262 A LSN LANS oa E E A 264 ATT VLAN Members NiD vecasigescictares tet adosuaainsshoansrnaitannsusatesadensaneatvaatacincinmavan tet odneanstniwassianeketasein tet E EESE 264 AZ VIAN PO er A A EAE E S 266 A TA VCL oirnne EOE E as 268 4 14 1 MAC b based VLAN hsseaseassecessinetoadancatescnadasdeahacasasnadananoessaassagadderbdewansoatedine dntnassanaatosseanieaatnaaegaadeesevenbearis 268 A 142 Protocol based VLAN caccnsceees tees tuacie ate cna dices anaes arede bees Oa a aai 269 4 14 2 1 Protocol to Gi OU D sence sasuacansagxsadeansescvanentanadiene an aE EEA EAEE ANE ATA A
36. Based QoS The section will teach user to configure the DSCP Based QoS mode that This page allows you to configure the basic QOS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switches Web Interface To configure the DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Based QoS 2 Evoke to enable or disable the DSCP for Trust 3 Scroll to select QOS Class and DPL parameters 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 8 The DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification Configuration DSCP Based QoS Ingress Classification Home DSCP Based QoS DSCP Trust QoS Class DPL E oM Ce O oM oM i L oM o L o y v i L ov oly 59 oO ov ov 60 C 61 E ov 62 E ov OM 63 E oY User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 167 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Parameter description DSCP Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64 Trust Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted QoS Class QoS Class value can be any of 0 7 DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 3 Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh
37. Devige List IBE3J8 H IBE338 H 192 168 6 155 00 02 d1 2f 99 76 FEB191 E FERII 192 168 6151 O0 02 d1 30 cb d FESIELY Mega Pivel Apply The quick access menu is also available on the Google Map IB8338 H FS Device Management Link amp Re direct Link O Restore Default Opens the link troubleshooting page Reboot X Device Status a Opens a live view stream 1 For multi sensor ee Live Stream models only channel 1 video stream will be displayed User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 320 WWW VvIvoTekK comMm Chapter 9 Surveillance Network 9 1 Security The MAC Lock function places an access control on client computers Only the computers listed with its MAC addresses can access the PoE switch and make configuration changes When the MAC Lock is enabled all devices added to the switch will require that you manually add their MAC addresses to the list This feature is automatically synchronized to all subordinate PoE switches in the network Configuration is necessary on the root switch only Web interface To configure the Security function 1 Click Surveillance gt Surveillance Network gt Security 2 Select Enable in MAC Lock 3 Specify the MAC address of the client computer or newly added devices in the MAC add field 4 Click Apply and Add Figure 9 1 1 Security Security MAC Lock Disable V MAC Add aaa MAC List Select MAC No
38. E EE E E A EE A A T E AE A AE NE N 41 3 9 1 3 Authentication META OO siscincinncncscsnanncnnswondusdaddnnsandibendsvasiunwniasitedaidaastuddaddsiaedeaaavacdeade abaseosDasssvecdeeates 43 ZN E a EE e E E E E E S E EE EEE A 44 FEO NNE ea E AE EE 45 JIEN a E E E A E EA A E E 59 eo 2a Y V Gl qa Am Ae PA ne ee 65 21 AMI CG ON IU Ol E E E E tote usageeeenendansuvesanesadietecancinnecanntineseeamts 65 FILA NA eee ccc acc ace va a ccie carp E oemceeseses cree A OEA E N 69 Me access caeeecs A E A dcr du aaa pee E cao aan aaa oan saan sea saeceereeecios 76 eA OCS AN e E enna E sau E E E A O T TE E 84 3 5 2 9 ARP INS peU asernes nedan ea anA near AAEE EAEEREN 87 BBE aa EE AA T E E E E 94 FIRAD a E E E E EE AT EE AAA A 94 JG Aprep AUION nE E EEEE EEO 97 Ose Sel A O E OEE A O OEE A E TO EA eects 97 Bi NIGP E E EE E E scone E A A E A EA E E A E E E 99 2 7 LOOD Protecti OM ixsencepcecanccnasaecoansiacweupsnscwscasusewcnuinsneaeesctawecaviows en tececcewsuaesieusenedserausenietewsesteneneewseasunbaeessine 101 3 8 Spanning WCC sruron aA 103 2e BNdee SENINE ais S S S SO 103 Sa LNO EEM APPIE ena E E E E A E A A 106 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 4 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm BS IES Cl FON ENG a won rasaecasslouseaatinonsaaseysoniaceprasiiausitaiuonleaaioageasat vance vin E EA 108 BO lo OUTS tars crcapesectaanadatenas Sait autesntngnr E E gatos veueaieteLonergmaaunies 109 IVS ONS srs tevaaipyoscied casas suncarceaawedacnis soared sviudanideaunnsiodecadn
39. Entries Deleted Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 258 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm Total Neighbours Entries Dropped Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information e Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error Frames Discarded lf an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbours in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port s link is down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out TLVs Discarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded TLVs Unrecognized The number
40. NMS running the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP can manage the Managed devices equipped with SNMP agent provided that the Management Information Base MIB is installed correctly on the managed devices The SNMP is a protocol that is used to govern the transfer of information between SNMP manager and agent and traverses the Object Identity OID of the management Information Base MIB described in the form of SMI syntax SNMP agent is running on the switch to response the request issued by SNMP manager Basically it is passive except issuing the trap information The switch supports a switch to turn on or off the SNMP agent If you set the field SNMP Enable SNMP agent will be started up All supported MIB OIDs including RMON MIB can be accessed via SNMP manager If the field SNMP is set Disable SNMP agent will be de activated the related Community Name Trap Host IP Address Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored 3 5 1 7 1 System This section describes how to configure SNMP System on the switch This function is used to configure SNMP settings community name trap host and public traps as well as the throttle of SNMP A SNMP manager must pass the authentication by identifying both community names then it can access the MIB information of the target device So both parties must have the same community name Once completing the setting click lt Apply gt button the setting takes effect Web Interface To disp
41. Ping Interval 1 Egress Interface Parameter description IP Address The destination IP Address with IPv6 Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Egress Interface Only for I Pv6 The VLAN ID VID of the specific egress IPv6 interface which ICMP packet goes The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only when the corresponding IPv6 interface is valid When the egress interface is not given PING6 finds the best match interface for destination Do not specify egress interface for loopback address Do specify egress interface for link local or multicast address Start Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMPv6 packet size what set on the switch After you press 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING server 10 10 132 20 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 275 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq O time Oms icmp_seq 1 time Oms icmp_se
42. Select this option to delete an existing IP route Network The destination IP network or host address of this route Valid format is dotted decimal notationor a valid IPv6 notation A default route can use the value 0 0 0 0or IPv6 notation Mask Length The destination IP network or host mask in number of bits prefix length It defines how much of a network address that must match in order to qualify for this route Valid values are between 0 and 32 bits respectively 128 for IPv6 routes Only a default route will have a mask length of 0 as it will match anything Gateway The IP address of the IP gateway Valid format is dotted decimal notationor a valid IPv6 notation Gateway and Network must be of the same type Next Hop VLAN Only for I Pv6 The VLAN ID VID of the specific IPv6 interface associated with the gateway The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only when the corresponding IPv6 interface is valid If the IPv6 gateway address is link local it must specify the next hop VLAN for the gateway If the IPv6 gateway address is not link local system ignores the next hop VLAN for the gateway Buttons Add Interface Click to add a new IP interface A maximum of 8 interfaces is supported Add Route Click to add a new IP route Amaximum of 32 routes is supported Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values
43. Statistics LACP Statistics Home Port Statistics Auto refresh _ aA z Discarded LACP LACP Port Received Transmitted Unknown Illegal 1 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 0 26 0 0 0 0 Parameter description Port The switch port number LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port Buttons Auto refresh z Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Clear Clears the counters for the selected port User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 239 WWWEVIiVva tT S Kk oaom Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 240 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm 4 7 Loop Protection This section displays the loop protection port status the ports of the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the Loop Protection status in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Loop Protection 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Statistics Figure 4 7 Loop Protection Status Loop Protection Status Home Loop Protection Auto refresh _ a Port Action Transmit Loops Status Loop Time of Last L
44. T switch Pipcam amp Encoder VY NVR VIP Device Y CMS IS Device Mame Model Name Mac E F FoE Port An unmanaged device is displayed with a no entry mark The information for such device will be limited o 192 166 1 6 Barr 5 You can mouse over the PoE switch to quickly view the total PoE output The same information is also shown on each network camera Type Device Mame Model Name Mac IP PoE Status P8162 169 254 212 177 P833 Dart 26 192 168 41 126 169 254 212 177 Port 26 X Remove Off Link Unit A z 3 Device Status 192 168 40 14 Mega Pixel Network Camera Device Status amp Device Management Link Re direct Link Cl Restore Default 5 Rebooted X Device Status gt Live Stream Offline device Unmanaged device Managed device When the configuration is done use the Export Topology function on the upper right of the screen to export your configuration The file format can be SVG PNG or PDF eHome Graphicview Topology view W Export Topology to ct 3 Device List w Normal Group Note that if using IE browser you can only export in the SVG format User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 315 WWW VvIVvoTeEK comMm If you click on a surveillance switch a PoE Config function is available that allows you to control the PoE output on all switch ports and to enable or disable the Auto Checking function The Auto Checking function intermittently examine
45. Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Enhanced 911 services Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet PoE end points Inventory management allowing network administrators to track their network devices and determine their characteristics manufacturer software and hardware versions serial or asset number This page allows you to configure the LLDP MED This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED Web Interface To configure LLDP MED Click LLDP MED Configuration Modify Fast start repeat count parameter default is 4 Modify Coordinates Location psrameters Fill Civic Address Location parameters Add new policy Click Apply will show following Policy Port Configuration Select Policy ID for each port Click Apply tS Oe eS S Figure 3 10 2 The LLDP MED Configuration LLDP MED Configuration Home LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Fast start repeat count 4 Coordinates Location Latitude 0 i North Longitude 0 j East M Altitude 0 Meters W Map Datum WGS84 M Civic Address Location Country code State County city City district Block Neighborhood Street Leading street direction Tralling street suffix Street suffix House no House no suffix Landmark Additional location info Name Zip code Building Apartment Floor Room m Place type Postal community name P O Box Additional code User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 121 WWWEVIiVva tT SKk oaom Emergency Call Service
46. WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK comMm QoS class DP level to PCP DEI Mapping Controls the mapping of the classified QoS class DP level to PCP DEI values when the mode is set to Mapped Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Cancel Click to cancel the changes User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 164 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK comMm 3 16 7 Port DSCP The section will teach user to set the QoS Port DSCP configuration that was allowed you to configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports Others the settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port DSCP parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port DSCP 2 Evoke to enable or disable the Ingress Translate and Scroll the Classify Parameter configuration 3 Scroll to select Egress Rewrite parameters 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 7 The QoS Port DSCP Configuration QoS Port DSCP Configuration Home Port DSCP Ingress Egress Port Translate Classify Rewrite E Mi lt gt vi 1 Disable M Disable v 2 Disable N Disable 23 Disable M Disable M 24 Disable V Disable bd 25 Disable M Disable M 26 Disable
47. WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 7 1 Information The Information page shows general system information for the PoE Surveillance Switch including its Surveillance software version the number of devices to be managed MAC Address Surveillance Working Status and the current IP Address for the Switch Web interface To configure Surveillance Information in the web interface 1 2 Click Surveillance Management and Information Select whether to enable or disable the Surveillance State If there are multiple surveillance switches in your network you can start your configuration from one surveillance switch selected as the root switch The other surveillance switches can be deployed as subordinate switches Enable the Surveillance State on the root switch and the configuration will automatically apply to its subordinates For example subordinate switches can be automatically detected on the network As illustrated below you can configure a VLAN that span across multiple switches Configuration is made on the root switch only In this way the configuration of the entire surveillance network is made easy Root switch AW GEV 2644 185 192 166 6 149 switch lpcam amp Encoder P NVR PIP Device 9 cms Subordinate switch Mega Pixel Network 192 168 6 160 Port 14 AW GEV 264A 185 IB8338 H 192 168 6 130 192 168 6 155 por 25 Port 26 Port 1 VLAN 1 2 Mega Pixel Network 192 168 6 161 Port 1
48. be automatically synchronized among these switches The configuration effort is thus minimized Root switch Sync Z Se Client switch 1 Client switch 2 Client switch 3 Client switch 4 DOR Cameras amp NVR Cameras amp NVR Cameras amp NVR Intranet PCs User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 308 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm VLAN on the Topology View A Virtual LAN VLAN is a broadcast domain that is partitioned and isolated in a network at the data link layer OSI layer 2 LAN is an abbreviation of Local Area Network Broadcast packets can be limited to within a VLAN broardcast domain to avoid broadcast storm The surveillance switch supports the following for VLAN configuration 1 IEE802 1Q Tagged VLAN especially when a VLAN spans across multiple switches Port based VLAN For example VLAN1 ports 2 3 4 5 VLAN2 8 9 10 11 MAC based VLAN For example VLAN1 MAC2 MAC3 MAC4 MACS VLAN2 MAC8 MACY MAC10 MAC11 4 Protocol based VLAN For example IP IPX AppleTalk NetBIOS ARP RARP PPPoE 5 IP Subnet based VLAN For example VLAN1 140 114 76 xx VLAN2 140 114 77xx Grouping devices IP cameras with a common set of requirements regardless of their physical location by VLAN can greatly simplify network design A VLAN has the same attributes as a physical local area network LAN but it allows end stations to be grouped together more easily even if they are not on the same network switch To physically rep
49. blank field 3 Click the refresh to update the data or click lt lt or gt gt to display previous entry or next entry 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 9 1 2 The I GMP Snooping VLAN Configuration IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration BHome VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page A Delete VLANID Snooping Enabled Querier Election Querier Address Compatibility PRI RV QI sec QRI 0 1sec LLAI 0 1 sec URI sec Add New IGMP VLAN Apply Reset IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration Home VLAN Configuration Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page E Delete VLANID Snooping Querier Querier Address Compatibility PRI RV QI sec QRI 0 1 LLQI 0 1 URI sec Enabled Election sec sec C 0 0 0 0 IGMP Auto N o v 2 125 100 10 1 Add New IGMP VLAN Parameter description Delete Check to delete the entry The designated entry will be deleted during the next save e VLANID It displays the VLAN ID of the entry IGMP Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected Querier Election Enable to join IGMP Querier election in the VLAN Disable to act as an IGMP Non Querier Querier Address User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 116 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP Querier
50. com Transmit Hold Count The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs Edge Port BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology Port Error Recovery Control whether a port in the error disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain time If recovery is not enabled ports have to be disabled and re enabled for normal STP operation The condition is also cleared by a system reboot Port Error Recovery Timeout The time to pass before a port in the error disabled state can be enabled Valid values are between 30 and 86400 seconds 24 hours Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 105 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 8 2 MSTI Mapping When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped Due to the reason that you need to set the list of VLANs ma
51. configure SNMPv3 group The Entry index key are Security Model and Security Name To create a new group account please check lt Add new group gt button and enter the group information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number v1 2 v2 2 v3 10 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Groups in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Groups 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Apply Figure 3 5 1 7 5 The SNMP Groups Configuration SNMPv3 Group Configuration Home Groups Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name v1 public default_ro_group C v1 private default_rw_group v2c public default_ro_group C v2c private default_rw_group C usm default_user default_rw_group Add New Entry SNMPv3 Group Configuration Home Groups Delete Security Model Security Name Group Name C v1 public default_ro_group O v1 private default_rw_group C v2c public default_ro_group O v2c private default_rw_group C usm default_user default_rw_group v1 M public M Add New Entry Parameter description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 53 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com v1 Reserved for SNMPvl1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry
52. e Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Adding a New Static Entry Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click Apply Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 136 3 13 VLANs WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com To assign a specific VLAN for management purpose The management VLAN is used to establish an IP connection to the switch from a workstation connected to a port in the VLAN This connection supports a VSM SNMPsession By default the active management VLAN is VLAN 1 but you can designate any VLAN as the management VLAN using the Management VLAN window Only one management VLAN can be active at a time When you specify a new management VLAN your HTTP connection to the old management VLAN is lost For this reason you should have a connection between your management station and a port in the new management VLAN or connect to the new management VLAN through a multi VLAN route Web Interface To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration VLANS 2 Specify Existiong VLANs Ethertype for Custom S ports 3 Click Apply Figure 3 13 1 The VLAN Configuration VLAN Configuration Global VLAN Configuration
53. enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The Delete button can be used to undo the addition of new IP subnet based VLANs The maximum possible IP subnet based VLAN entries are limited to 128 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 150 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 16 QoS The switch support four QoS queues per port with strict or weighted fair queuing scheduling It supports QoS Control Lists QCL for advance programmable QoS classification based on IEEE 802 1p Ethertype VID IPv4 IPv6 DSCP and UDP TCP ports and ranges High flexibility in the classification of incoming frames to a QoS class The QoS classification looks for information up to Layer 4 including IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP IPv4 TCP UDP port numbers and user priority of tagged frames This QoS classification mechanism is implemented in a QoS control list QCL The QoS class assigned to a frame is used throughout the device for providing queuing scheduling and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was configured for that specific QoS class The switch support advanced memory control mechanisms providing excellent performance of all QoS classes under any traffic scenario including jumbo frame A super priority queue with dedicated memory and strict highest priority in the arbitration The ingress super priority queue allows traffic recognized as CPU traffic to be received and queued for transmission to the CPU even when all the QoS class
54. end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To configure a Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface Figure 3 5 2 5 4 The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Home Dynamic Table Auto refresh e Startfrom Porti M VLAN 1 MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page System Configuration Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Translate to static No more entries Parameter description ARP Inspection Table Columns U Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted MAC Address User MAC address of the entry IP Address User IP address of the entry Translate to static ser Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 92 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Select the checkbox to translate the entry to static entry Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Refreshes the displayed table starting from the input fields Save Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Dynamic ARP Inspe
55. entry This may be LINK or IPv4 Address Show the current address of the interface of the given type Status Show the status flags of the interface and or address I P Routes Network Show the destination IP network or host address of this route Gateway Show the gateway address of this route Status Show the status flags of the route Neighbour cache IP Address Show the IP address of the entry Link Address Show the Link MAC address for which a binding to the IP address given exist Buttons Auto refresh A Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 186 4 1 3 Log WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm This section describes that display the system log information of the switch Web Interface To display the log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Monitor System and Log 2 Display the log information Figure 4 1 3 The System Log Information System Log Information neh Level Als M Clear Level All M The total number of entries is 4 for the given level Start fromID i with 20 entries per page System Log ID Level Time 1 Warning 2011 01 01T00 14 29 00 00 2 Info 2011 01 01T00 14 48 00 00 3 Warning 2011 01 01T03 12 40 00 00 4 Warning 2011 01 01T03 12 45 00 00 Parameter description Auto refresh Home Log Message Link up o
56. entry on the ACE Configuration page note that the ltems displayed depend on various selections such as Frame Type and IP Protocol Type Specify the relevant criteria to be matched for this rule and set the actions to take when a rule is matched such as Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging and Shutdown he Figure 3 5 2 3 3 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Access Control List Configuration Home Access Control List Auto refresh E EA Ea Ingress Port Policy Bitmask Frame Type Action Rate Limiter Port Redirect Mirror Counter User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 80 ACE Configuration Ingress Port Poti Port 2 Pot3 wy Port 4 Policy Filter Any y Frame Type Any M Parameter description Ingress Port WWWEViVviatSskKk So mM Home Access Control List Action Permit M Rate Limiter Disabled Mirror Disabled Logging Disabled V Shutdown Disabled V Counter 0 VLAN Parameters 802 1Q Tagged Any VLAN ID Filter Any Tag Priority Any Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Policy Bitmask Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note
57. for older firmware releases This does not constitute an error Web Interface To configure a Firmware Upgrade Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select Maintenance Software in you device 2 Click Image Select Figure 6 3 2 The Firmware selection Software Image Selection Active Image Image managed Version GEPoEL 2P ESW 26G standalone v6 03 Date 2014 09 30T16 10 26 08 00 Alternate Image Image managed bk Version Date Activate Alternate Image Image Information e Image The flash index name of the firmware image The name of primary preferred image is image the alternate image is named image bk User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 283 WWW VvIVOoOTeEK comMm Version The version of the firmware image Date The date where the firmware was produced Buttons Activate Alternate Image Click to use the Activate Alternate Image This button may be disabled depending on system state Cancel Cancel activating the backup image Navigates away from this page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 284 WWW VvIvoTeK comMm 6 4 Configuration The switch stores its configuration in a number of text files in CLI format The files are either virtual RAM based or stored in flash on the switch There are three system files running config A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on the switch This file is volatile m startup config The startup c
58. gt Config File 2 You can select configuration files and delete these files by selecting their checkboxes and click the Delete button Or you may download the configuration file to the client PC using the Download button 3 You can also export the files to a TFTP server by entering the TFTP address checking the files to be uploaded and click the Export To button IMPORTANT If you need to export the configuration to a client computer a TF TP server is required in your network The configuration file is transported via a TF TP server Figure 7 6 3 Config File Switch Storage File Manage Total 39 files Used 2 file s Free 37 file s Select File Name Download Download a 1P8352_0002D112F4A7_192 168 0 6 2011010100139 tar gz Download Download E IP8337H_000201278298_192_168_0_6_201101010111 tar gz Delete TFTP Server 7 7 Switch twitch LETT Praen kf kanma stana Modal anne Device Mani MAC IP Addr Or Line AGL oo ie LS AOL We od Be DS OCH LAE rod BE ea P21 oe Om Ling ATL a el he DB APOL Y ee DE COCO LEE Re mn Pa2 loo 1a VIVOTEK s surveillance switches discovered from your network will be listed here Note that you cannot remove a surveillance switch if it has been configured into a network configuration e g a VLAN The online switches IP addresses are hyperlinks You can open a web console with them using a single click In the Search box Model Name MAC address and IP address can be us
59. in 1000 X speed Cu port disabled 1000 X_AMS Port in AMS mode SFP port in 1000 X speed Cu port in Auto mode Ports in AMS mode with 1000 X speed has Cu port preferred Ports in AMS mode with 100 FX speed has fiber port preferred Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected on a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed and the Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed e Maximum Frame Size Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collisions default Restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions Buttons Apply Click to save changes User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 29 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port link Status by manual User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 30 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 3 2 Ports Desc
60. in identifying a VLAN ID in an Access Accept packet The following criteria are used e The Tunnel Medium Type Tunnel Type and Tunnel Private Group ID attributes must all be present at least once in the Access Accept packet e The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value and fulfil the following requirements if Tag 0 is used the Tunnel Private Group ID does not need to include a Tag Value of Tunnel Medium Type must be set to IEEE 802 ordinal 6 Value of Tunnel Type must be set to VLAN ordinal 13 Value of Tunnel Private Group ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range 0 9 which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID Leading O s are discarded The final value must be in the range 1 4095 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 14 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Guest VLAN Enabled When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration Guest VLAN Operation When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch st
61. it 4 Click Apply Figure 3 1 5 The System Log configuration System Log Configuration Home Log Server Mode Disabled Server Address Parameter description Server Mode Indicate the server mode operation When the mode operation is enabled the syslog message will send out to syslog server The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments back sender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist Possible modes are Enabled Enable server mode operation Disabled Disable server mode operation Server Address Indicates the IPv4 hosts address of syslog server If the switch provide DNS feature it also can be a host name Syslog Level Indicates what kind of message will send to syslog server Possible modes are Info Send information warnings and errors Warning Send warnings and errors Error Send errors Buttons These buttons are displayed on the NTP page Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 29 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 2 Green Ethernet EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is low or no traffic utilization EEE works by powering down circuits when ther
62. number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Received The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leaves Received The number of Received V2 Leaves Router Port Display which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port Port Switch port number Status Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not Buttons Auto refresh _ B z Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Clear Clears the counters for the selected port Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 246 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 4 9 1 2 Group Information After you complete to set the IGMP Snooping function then you could let the switch to display the IGMP Snooping Group Information Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by group The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping Group Info
63. or alphabetic characters e VLAN ID Enter a number ranging from 2 to 4095 as the VLAN ID Member Setting Single click to select an NVR CMS device or camera from the device list You can also use the combination of Shift key and mouse clicks to select multiple devices Click the Add button to move them to the column on the right When done click the Apply button at the bottom of the screen Modification Buttons Add a new entry Edit an existing entry amp Delete an existing entry User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 323 Chapter 10 Surveillance Monitor 10 1 Traffic Chart This page displays a visual chart of network traffic of all the devices managed by the PoE switch Numbers are shown in Mbit s The switch can keep the traffic chart records for up to two weeks Web interface To view the traffic through all the switch ports or a specific port 1 Click Surveillance gt Monitor gt and Traffic Chart 2 Click on specific port on the traffic chart to reveal its traffic during the day You can select to display a summary of a week s traffic by selecting the check circle on top The same applies to the selection of Rx Tx traffic A single port s traffic is shown at the lower half of the screen 3 To select to display the throughput of a single camera mouse over to display its information and then single click to display Figure 10 1 1 Traffic Monitor viverex AW GEV 2644 185 P T
64. or not This is useful in scenarios where a cloud of intermediary switches must bridge VLANs that haven t been created By configuring the ports that connect the cloud of switches as trunking ports they can seemlessly carry those VLANs from one end to the other Ingress Acceptance Hybrid ports allow for changing the type of frames that are accepted on ingress Tagged and Untagged Both tagged and untagged frames are accepted Tagged Only Only tagged frames are accepted on ingress Untagged frames are discarded Untagged Only Only untagged frames are accepted on ingress Tagged frames are discarded Egress Tagging Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control the tagging of frames on egress Untag Port VLAN Frames classified to the Port VLAN are transmitted untagged Other frames are transmitted with the relevant tag Tag All All frames whether classified to the Port VLAN or not are transmitted with a tag Untag All All frames whether classified to the Port VLAN or not are transmitted without a tag This option is only available for ports in Hybrid mode Allowed VLANS Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control which VLANs they are allowed to become members of Access ports can only be member of one VLAN the Access VLAN The field s syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Existing VLANs field By default a port may become member of all possible VLANs and is therefore set to 1 4095 The field may be left e
65. port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address Web Interface To configure a Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Security Network ARP Inspection 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics 4 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address and entries per page Figure 4 5 1 3 The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Home ARP Inspection Auto refresh _ Start from Port M VLAN 1 MAC address ___00 00 00 00 00 00 and IP address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address No more entries Parameter description Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start addres
66. refresh the page immediately lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Alarm Table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 233 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 4 5 3 1 4 Event This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Event table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Event table The Start from Event Index and Log Index allows the user to select the starting point in the Event table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest Event table match The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To configure a RMON Event Overview in the web interface 1 Click Security Switch RMON then Event 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics 4 Specify Port which wants to check Figure 4 5 3 1 4 RMON Event Overview RMON Event Overview Home Event Auto refres
67. row Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port Note For a given port a frame is only transmitted once It is i therefore not possible to mirror Tx frames on the mirror port Because of this mode for the selected mirror port is limited to Disabled or Rx only Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 180 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK comMm 3 18 UPnP UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play The goals of UPnP are to allow devices to connect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home data sharing communications and entertainment and in corporate environments for simplified installation of computer components Web Interface To configure the UPnP Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration UPnP 2 Scroll to select the mode to enable or disable 3 Specify the parameters in each blank field 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will reve
68. server is enabled The time interval measured in milliseconds between the most recent Access Reply Access Challenge and the Round Tri radiusAuthClientExtRoundT Access Request that matched it from the RADIUS p Time ripTime authentication server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet State RADIUS Accounting Statistics The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 RADIUS Accounting Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Packet Counters RADIUS accounting server packet counter There are five receive and four transmit counters Direction Name RFC4670 Name Description radiusAccClientExtResponse The number of RADIUS packets Rx Responses A valid or invalid received from the server Rx Malformed radiusAccClientExtMalformed The number of malformed RADIUS User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 225 Rx Rx Rx pe TX TX Tx Other Info Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Requests Retransmission S Pending Requests Timeouts WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Responses packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators receive
69. shall be allowed by a Combo Box When ALL VLAN Users are selected it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users and this is by default VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwarded on the respective VLAN member ports Navigating the VLAN Monitor page Each page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN Table match The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over Buttons Auto retresh _ Combined 7 vi Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 265 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 4 13 2 VLAN Port The function Port Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the order of Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN
70. spanning trees for MSTI s Intra region The name is at most 32 characters Configuration Revision The revision of the MSTI configuration named above This must be an integer between 0 and 65535 MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is not available for explicit mapping as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped VLANs Mapped The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI The VLANs can be given as a single xx xx being between 1 and 4094 VLAN or a range xx yy each of which must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it Example 2 5 20 40 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 107 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 3 8 3 MSTI Priorities When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active For controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities parameters in the web interface Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Priorities Scroll the Priority maximum is 240 Def
71. specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 Adding a new policy Click to add a new policy Specify the Application type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority and DSCP for the new policy Click Save Port Policies Configuration Every port may advertise a unique set of network policies or different attributes for the same network policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration Port The port number to which the configuration applies Policy Id The set of policies that shall apply to a given port The set of policies is selected by check marking the checkboxes that corresponds to the policies Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 126 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK com 3 11 PoE PoE is an acronym for Power Over Ethernet Power Over Ethernet is used to transmit electrical power to remote devices over standard Ethernet cable It could for example be used for powering IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other equipment where it would be difficult or expensive to connect the equipment to main power supply The PoE detect function is follow the table Stages of Powering up a PoE Link Action Volts specified V Detection PSE detects if the P
72. static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server MVRP Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol MVRP allows dynamic registration and deregistration of VLANs on ports on a VLAN bridged network Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment e VLAN ID VLAN ID for which the Port members are displayed Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID If a port is included in a VLAN an image w will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list an image will be displayed If a port is included in a Forbidden port list and dynamic VLAN user register VLAN on same Forbidden port then conflict port will be displayed as gt lt User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 264 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com VLAN Membership The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs configured by a selected VLAN User selection
73. that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames I Pv4 The ACE will match all Pv4 frames I Pv4 ICMP The ACE will match Pv4 frames with ICMP protocol I Pv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol I Pv4 TCP The ACE will match Pv4 frames with TCP protocol I Pv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not CMP UDP TCP IPv6 The ACE will match all Pv6 standard frames Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Filter Frames matching the ACE are filtered Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 81 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Indicates the logging operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled
74. the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications FCC Caution To assure continued compliance example use only shielded interface cables when connection to computer or peripheral devices Any changes or modifications not expressly User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 2 approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation CE mark Warning This is a Class B device In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Note Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features or instructions WARNING Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury CAUTION Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data or damage the system or equipment User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 3 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Table of Contents INEPRO DUCT ON e caer can go vars ence T E
75. the management client to login via the local user database if none of the configured authentication servers are alive Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 43 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 2 5 1 4 HT TPs This section shows you how to use HTTPS to securely access the Switch HTTPS is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication via the browser Web Interface To configure a HTTPS Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of HTTPS Configuration 2 Select Enabled in the Automatic Redirect of HTTPS Configuration 3 Click Apply Figure 3 5 1 5 The HTTPS Configuration HTTPS Configuration Home Configu Securit HTTPS Mode Disabled v Automatic Redirect Disabled W Parameter description Mode Indicates the HTTPS mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS mode operation Automatic Redirect Indicates the HTTPS redirect mode operation Automatically redirect web browser to HTTPS when HTTPS mode is enabled Possible modes are Enabled Enable HTTPS redirect mode operation Disabled Disable HTTPS redirect mode operation User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 44 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 5 1 6 SNMP Any Network Management System
76. the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over IGMP Group Table Columns e VLANID VLAN ID of the group Groups Group address of the group displayed Port Members Ports under this group User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 247 WWW VvIvoTeK comMm Buttons Auto refresh _ B Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page lt lt Updates the system log entries to the first available entry ID gt gt Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 248 WWW VvIvoTeK comMm 4 10 LLDP 4 10 1 Neighbour This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP neighbours 1 Click Monitor LLDP Neighbours 2 Click Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 4 10 1 The LLDP Neighbours information LLDP Neighbor Information Home Neighbor Auto refresh aA LLDP Remote Device Summary Local Port ChassisID PortID Port Description System Name System Capabilities System Description Management Address No neighbor information found Note If your network without any device supports LLDP then the table
77. the vertical datum specified Floors Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floor to floor dimensions An altitude 0 0 is meaningful even outside a building and represents ground level at the given latitude and longitude Inside a building 0 0 represents the floor level associated with ground level at the main entrance Map Datum The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options WGS84 Geographical 3D World Geodesic System 1984 CRS Code 4327 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich NAD83 NAVD88 North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 NAVD88 This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land not near tidal water which would use Datum NAD83 MLLW NAD83 MLLW North American Datum 1983 CRS Code 4269 Prime Meridian Name Greenwich The associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water MLLW This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on water sea ocean Civic Address Location IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information Civic Address LCI Country code The two letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters Example DK DE or US State National subdivisions state canton region province prefecture County County parish gun Japan district City City township shi Japa
78. transmits LLDP frames to its neighbours for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted an LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected as reflected by the page header Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port Mode Select LLDP mode Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch
79. up time to do PoE Auto Checking default 60 range 30 600 sec Interval Time sec Device will send checking message to PD each interval time default 30 range 10 120 SEC Retry Time When PoE port can t ping the PD it will retry to send detection again When the third time it User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 133 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com will trigger failure action default 3 range 1 5 Failure Log Failure loggings counter Failure Action The action when the third fail detection Nothing Keep Ping the remote PD but does nothing further Reboot Remote PD Cut off the power of the PoE port make PD rebooted Power OFF Time sec When PD has been rebooted the PoE port restored power after the specified time default 15 range 3 120 sec User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 134 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 12 MAC Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for Knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the swit
80. which switch port details to display The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmit Web Interface To Display the per Port detailed Statistics Overview in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Ports then Detailed Port Statistics a 2 Port statistics overview Scroll the Port Index to select which port you want to show the detailed Figure 4 3 4 The Detailed Port Statistics Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 Auto refresh KA z Receive Total Rx Packets Rx Octets Rx Unicast Rx Multicast Rx Broadcast Rx Pause Receive Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes Rx 65 127 Bytes Rx 128 255 Bytes Rx 256 511 Bytes Rx 512 1023 Bytes Rx 1024 1526 Bytes Rx 1527 Bytes Port 1 y 56754 8138095 36253 8263 12238 0 34048 7938 5161 9176 431 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 Transmit Total Tx Packets Tx Octets Tx Unicast Tx Multicast Tx Broadcast Tx Pause Transmit Size Counters Tx 64 Bytes Tx 65 127 Bytes Tx 128 255 Bytes Tx 256 511 Bytes Tx 512 1023 Bytes Tx 1024 1526 Bytes Tx 1527 Bytes If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh Click Refresh click Clear to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you Detailed Statistics 39099 16948240 26422 12673 4 0 871 12926 9476 790
81. will show No LLDP neighbour information found Parameter description e Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbour s LLDP frames PortiID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbour port Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit System Name system Name is the name advertised by the neighbour unit System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbour unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other 2 Repeater 3 Bridge 4 WLAN Access Point User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 249 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 8 Station only 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by Management Address Management Address is the neighbour unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist discovery by the network management This could for instance hold the neighbour s IP address Buttons Auto refresh L Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 250 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 4 10 2 LLDP MED Neighbour This page provides a status overview of a
82. zone Range Up to 16 characters Daylight Saving Time Configuration e Daylight Saving Time This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration Select Disable to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration Select Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year Select Non Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration Default Disabled Recurring Configuration Start time settings Week Select the starting week number Day Select the starting day Month Select the starting month Hours Select the starting hour Minutes Select the starting minute End time settings Week Select the ending week number Day Select the ending day Month Select the ending month Hours Select the ending hour Minutes Select the ending minute Offset settings Offset Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time Range 1 to 1440 Note The under Start Time Settings and End Time Settings was displayed what you set on the Start Time Settings and End Time Settings field information User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 296 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm Buttons These buttons are displayed on the NTP page Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to pr
83. 0 42 7884 197 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm Receive Queue Counters Transmit Queue Counters Rx QO 56754 Tx QO 0 Rx Q1 0 Tx Q1 0 Rx Q2 0 Tx Q2 0 Rx Q3 0 Tx Q3 0 Rx Q4 0 Tx Q4 0 Rx Q5 0 Tx Q5 0 Rx Q6 0 Tx Q6 0 Rx Q7 0 Tx Q7 39099 Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx Drops 0 Tx Drops 0 Rx CRC Alignment 0 Tx Late Exc Coll 0 Rx Undersize 0 Rx Oversize 0 Rx Fragments 0 Rx Jabber 0 Rx Filtered 4614 Parameter description Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Port Statistics information automatically Upper left scroll bar To scroll which port to display the Port statistics with Port O Port 1 Receive Total and Transmit Total Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Unicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 198 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK com an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmit
84. 0 300sec When rebooting the PoE port will start to provide power to the PD when it out of delay time default 0 range 0 300 sec User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 130 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 11 3 Scheduling This page allows the user to make a perfect schedule of PoE power supply PoE Scheduling not only makes PoE management easier but also saves more energy Web Interface To Display Power Over Ethernet Scheduling in the web interface 1 Click Configuration PoE and Scheduling 2 Select the local port and enable 3 Select time and day to supply power 4 Click Apply to apply the change Figure 3 11 2 The PoE Scheduling PoE Scheduling Home Scheduling Port 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Status X X X X X X KH KKH KH KH KH KH KH KH KH KH KH KH KH KH HK HK Port 1 Status Disable M Select All Hour Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday i i L L L L L E H L LI L L E L Ci EL O L L L L L L ACE PO LI L L L L L 20 iL L L LI LI L og L L a L L LI L 11 L L E L E L S L L L E LI E L Parameter description Power Supply Configuration Port This is the logical port number for this row Status User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 131 PoE Scheduling Status Enabled Enable POE Scheduling Disabled Disable POE Scheduling Hour The time of PoE port provide power of a day User Manual rev 1
85. 06 Camera Configure lt Un managed Devices lt s Graphic View lt ma Surveillance Network lt O Monitor lt am Diagnostics lt Maintenance lt Camera Batch SW Upgrade Home SD8 amp 364E WTK 0201c flash pkg Seldct Model Name Device Name MAC IP Address SD8364E 30x Zoom Mega Pixel Speed Dome Network Camera 0002D12A4A34 192 168 5 68 Previous User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 302 WWW VvIVvoTeK comMm 7 6 Camera Configure 7 6 1 Config Export Web interface To configure Surveillance Information in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Management gt Camera amp Encoder gt Config Export 2 Select the Device to export the configuration file from You can export IP cameras configuration profile 128KB in size to the client computer or to the switch itself Note that if you choose to export to the switch you can store up to 39 copies of camera configuration profile The Search box supports filtering find of devices using Model Name MAC address or IP addresses IMPORTANT If you need to export the configuration to a client computer a TFTP server is required in your network The configuration profile is transported via a TFTP server Camera Config Export Export to ClientPo Please Input TFTF Server IP 3 Click Start Figure 7 6 1 Config Export Camera Config Export Ho Export to Switd gt Select Model Name Device Name MAC IP Address O SD8364E 30x Zoom Mega Pixel
86. 134 aabboc 00 02 d1 26 c9 ab 197 168 0 4 O301c LJ B Online POS136 PDE136 O0 02 d1 29 64 cf 169 254 100 207 0101b Ci B Online IPEJGZ IP8362 1 O0 02 d1 2d 07 fd 169 254 7 253 0200d C Online IPBI62 hega Pixel Network Camera O0 07 d1 2d 08 d4 1927 168 0 69 O200d C Online IP8335H Mega Pinel Network Camera O0 02 d1 2d F0 f6 192 168 0 80 O204c User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 326 Surveillance Maintenance 12 1 Device info to CSV You can export the PoE switch s device information as a CSV file to a client computer The CSV file will be exported to the client computer currently having a web session with the switch Web interface To export switch device information to a client computer 1 Click Surveillance gt Maintenance gt and Device info to CSV 2 Click Export Figure 12 1 1 Device info to CSV Export Device Information to CSV Home gt Maintenance gt Device Info to CSV 12 2 Surveillance Config You can save or clear surveillance configuration on this page Web interface To save or clear surveillance configuration 1 Click Surveillance gt Maintenance gt and Surveillance Config 2 Click Save Configuration to save your current settings You may also use the Clear Configuration function to remove all existing configurations such as floor map or VLAN grouping The Factory Defaults button can be used to restore all switch configurations to factory defaults Figure 12 2 1 Surveillance Config Surveillance
87. 5535 Data Source Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored If in stacking switch the value must add 1000 switch ID 1 for example if the port is switch 3 port 5 the value is 2005 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds Buckets User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 59 WUW viv oTEK COM Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 50 6 Buckets Granted The number of data shall be saved in the RMON User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 60 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 5 1 7 2 History Configure RMON History table on this page The entry index key is ID Web Interface To display the configure RMON History in the web interface 1 Click RMON History 2 Click Add New Entry 3 Specify the ID parameters 4 Click Apply Figure 3 5 1 7 2 The RMON History Configuration RMON History Configuration Home History Buckets Delete ID Data Source Interval Buckets Granted Add New Entry Apply Reset RMON History Configuration Home History Buckets Delete ID Data Source Interval Buckets Granted hh dee ace 0 1800 50 Add New Entry Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the RMON History Configuration page Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save
88. 7 7 3 QuickTime Plugin consente di visualizzare una grande varieta di contenuti multimediali nelle pagine Web Per maggiori informazioni visita il sito QuickTime Disabilita Sempre consentito Chrome PDF Viewer Disabilita Sempre consentito Adobe Flash Player 2 files Versione 12 0 0 70 Shockwave Flash 12 0 r Disabilita Sempre consentite Default Browser Helper Versione 537 Fornisce informazioni sul browser web di default Disabilita Sempre consentito Native Client Disabilita sempre consentito e Chrome Remote Desktop 5 For example you can use the Troubleshooting function to figure out whether there is a link problem to a device The switch sends test packets to verify the link connectivity between switch port and camera This helps when diagnosing cabling problems in your deployments Another Try Show io v entries Select Status Model Name Device Name Online IP8152 Mega Pixel Network Camera Showing 1 to 4 of 4 entries Connection wv ps 192 168 1 2 00 00 81 52 01 12 RY oo i6h 6 148 00 02 d1 32 c5 25 Connection amp Cable status 0 142 168 6 150 00 02 d1 32 be 80 Connection a amp Cable status 0 G 152 165 6 161 00 02 d1 81 73 03 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 312 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm Figure 8 1 1 Topology View See below for the sample screen and mouse control Topology View hom Zoomin Zoom Out Hold down the button __ and move to
89. 8 Mega Pixel Network 147 y hel qi Bh 122 168 6 233 l Port 25 FE8191 192 1686 15 EY 192 168 6 231 Port 3 Port 25 IB8382 7 192 168 6 207 192 168 6 226 Port 4 Port 25 The QoS and Mac Lock functions also apply to this multi switch configuration Configuration is automatically synchronized among surveillance switches Device Scan range The max number of devices in a surveillance switch deployment is 1 024 If set to Automatic the IP range is 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 254 with a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 lf the Manual mode is selected the device scan can extend through 4 Class C subnets e g 192 168 1 1 192 168 4 254 with a Subnet Mask of 255 255 252 0 Note that a device scan will take up to 20 milliseconds to complete with a device range of 1 024 devices You should then specify the Starting and Ending IP addresses All VIVOTEK network devices will be discovered by the device scan Specify the QoS setting 0 has the lowest priority 7 the highest Quality of Service QoS prioritizes and reserves network capacity for mission critical video Assigning a high priority to video traffic ensures its timely delivery User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 291 VIVOTEK WWW viv OT EK C OM 4 Make configuration changes and then click the Apply button t EOTS AW G Traffic Monitor Switch Surveillance AW GEV 2644 185 Management lt e Graphic View lt W Surveillance Network lt O Monitor
90. AEE E 269 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 6 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com MV 2 Orup UO VLAN argsercsctsa snes seetet cca uc cect ecctiron EEEE eee 271 4 14 3 IP Subnet based VLAN sicsicscicassaccnscncssderdsasoavsccdueninccaaeunes daeeacadanendeauaniadarannsadniaeeaswerdieanieisadeanenenctiuaeeneds 272 CHAPTER 5 SWITCH DIAGNOSTICS siseerienccnetsrsonscesesvosasneanesmenincnsnnsnenssastsrssunenssdasedenieeananiaseshaste 273 SL PINE sveecnvcasavcusccwnewasavnawsnswenasastinacwawedenusansedpeanieuasesanbenavsassuswenansedenassnmacaseuscswstieanvaaseesWenamnesbersseeateastecueauer 273 Sa PINE O a E 275 SO VP a E E E 277 SAMC rOn a A E E E E E A 279 CHAPTER 6 SWITCH MAINTENANCE cccccscccseccseccsecsesceeneceseceeuctenseeneceeeteeseenseeneeeees 280 C LRE STE DEVICE irni E E E N 280 6 2 Factory Defan liS ensacsrna a E ENE 281 DFWINE a E A E T E A E 282 eae ED a o e REE TEE A E E T E E O EEN A V A ET 282 6 3 2 S ftware Image SAlOC Uc scccnccsiacsndcdocae ian darsesiutatandanainccdonte nes dsesaoaaneadanxd bie daresninddawenaryensedaiee TN 283 6 A Confie raO arsina E 285 6 4 T Save start Up CONTE sitscinectnacisareaacatsacianatievnesedramnneceeeamian avacateciateassananendutamntne dereutaneepnetnnemedieamadsedrraetmesinesaraat 285 CA UO A EAE A O E E N acer 286 CAS DOWN ae E E E E EN E E E E EES 287 64 OS ronseis e e aE r E a E an E A eiauenga nares 289 CHAPTER 7 SURVEILLANCE MANAGEMENT ccccscccsseccsecceseccenecceneceeeceeeceen
91. AGNOSTICS sicssscosncissacnswessnavassasanapteusceceddecemsniveeterieaneiene 326 TiL Device SACS ce casein sea conaan estesincnusacaeeaeanesemneiaeseasudsi eauaaanaeaieveaecnun N 326 CHAPTER 12 SURVEILLANCE MAINTENANCE ccc cccccecccecseesceseeesseseeseeeseesseuseeesenes 327 12 1 DEVICE info tO CSV cscticn cede cc cssseneeec once es vanceeascaes cece sceecor hs ieatetce cecasvieceecsean cess tscosehoseuseneevetssueessegesecs 327 12 2 Surveillance COMING vessesescnnecsceectssecceviesccncntaace vende scecsaneneeet vneceebetuade sen narcdeee bance eehdanseaewncdnetestenss see eesetaeds 327 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 8 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK com Revision History Date Lane Description 10 15 2014 Initial release 3 18 2015 rezos 14 Add desonpion Tore ve aranged Sonar Brena Added description for the re arranged Surveillance functional menus 8 10 2015 Added description for the following 1 Added switch as an Auto discovery device type for configuration in a deployment involving multiple surveillance switches Up to 1 024 devices in the device scan range Supports Automatic and Manual modes in device scan Supports JPG PDF SVG export configuration file formats in Topology View Supports JPG PDF SVG export file formats in the Floor View Added Live Stream in devices quick access menu in the Topology View Floor Map Google Map windows Added quick access menu in the Floor view and Google Map windows Supp
92. AS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Buttons Auto refresh a Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 212 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 4 5 2 1 2 Port The section describes to provides detailed NAS statistics for a specific switch port running EAPOL based IEEE 802 1X authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected backend server RADIUS Authentication Server statistics only Web Interface To configure a NAS Port Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Security Network NAS then Port 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 5 2 1 2 The NAS Statistics NAS Statistics Port 1 Home Port Auto refresh a Porti M Port State Admin State Force Authorized Port State Globally Disabled Parameter description Port State Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states QoS Class The QoS class ass
93. Access Control List ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses MAC addresses or other more specific criteria This switch tests ingress packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one A packet will be accepted as soon as it matches a permit rule or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule If no rules match the frame is accepted Other actions can also be invoked when a matching packet is found including rate limiting copying matching packets to another port or to the system log or shutting down a port This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined on this switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined The maximum number of ACEs is 256 on each switch Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list The reserved ACEs used for internal protocol cannot be edited or deleted the order sequence cannot be changed the priority is highest Web Interface To configure Access Control List in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Configuration 2 Click the button to add a new ACL or use the other ACL modification buttons to specify the editing action i e edit delete or moving the relative position of entry in the list To specific the parameter of the ACE Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 6 When editing an
94. Alarm Configuration page Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold The range is from 1 to 2431 1 e Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are InOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters InUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol InNUcastPkts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol InDiscards User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 62 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal InErrors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol InUnknownProtos the number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the unknown or un support protocol OutOctets The number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters OutUcastPkts The number of uni cast packets that request to transmit OutNUcastPkKts The number of broad cast and multi cast packets that request to transmit OutDiscards The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is normal OutErrors
95. Config Home gt Maintenance gt Surveillance Config Save or Clear Configuration to Flash Save Configuration Clear Configuration User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 327
96. D QoS Class Port VLAN ID 1 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 2 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 3 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 4 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 5 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 23 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 24 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 25 Force Authorized Globally Disabled 26 Force Authorized Globally Disabled Parameter description Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed NAS statistics for this port Admin State The port s current administrative state Refer to NAS Admin State for a description of possible values Port State The current state of the port Refer to NAS Port State for a description of the individual states Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication LastID The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Response Identity User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 211 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com EAPOL frame for EAPOL based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication QoS Class QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled e Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by N
97. D has the correct 2 10 1 signature resistance of 19 26 5 KQ sence PSE detects resistor indicating power 14 5 20 5 range Mark 1 Signals PSE is 802 3at capable PD presents a 0 25 4 mA load G a ese to indicate 802 3at capability Signals PSE is 802 3at capable PD ne presents a 0 25 4 mA load Startup Startup Startup voltage Startup voltage voltage Normal Supply power to device a 45 San 5 57 operation Power levels available Class Usage Power range Class description Watt Default 15 4 Classification unimplemented pt Optional 4 Very Low power Low Very Low power 2 E c Low power 3 Optional 154 4 Mid power Mid power ha for 802 3at Cs 2 High power devices not allowed for 802 3af devices 3 11 1 Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings and show all PoE Supply W Web Interface To configure Power Over Ethernet in the web interface 1 Click configuration PoE and configuration Specify the Reserved Power determined and Power Management ode Specify the PoE or PoE and Priority 3 Click Apply User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 127 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Figure 3 11 1 The PoE Configuration Power Over Ethernet Configuration Home Configuration Reserved Power determined by Class Allocation LLDP Med Power Management Mode Actual Consumption g Reserved Power PoE Power Supply Configuration Primary Power Supply W 2000
98. DMAC lt MAC gt Match specific DMAC The default value is Any SMAC Match specific source MAC address or Any If a port is configured to match on DMAC DIP this field indicates the DMAC Tag Type Indicates tag type Possible values are Any Match tagged and untagged frames Untagged Match untagged frames Tagged Match tagged frames C Tagged Match C tagged frames S Tagged Match S tagged frames The default value is Any VID Indicates VLAN ID either a specific VID or range of VIDs VID can be in the range 1 4095 or Any PCP Priority Code Point Valid values of PCP are specific O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI are 0 1 or Any Frame Type User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 174 WWWEVI Vet SkKk oaom Indicates the type of frame to look for incomming frames Possible frame types are Any The QCE will match all frame type Ethernet Only Ethernet frames with Ether Type 0x600 OxFFFF are allowed LLC Only LLC frames are allowed SNAP Only SNAP frames are allowed IPv4 The QCE will match only IPV4 frames IPv6 The QCE will match only IPV6 frames Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will b
99. Ds limited to 30W Priority The Priority represents the ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case where the remote devices requires more power than the power supply can deliver In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off starting from the port with the highest port number Maximum Power The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts that can be delivered to a remote device The maximum allowed value is 30 W User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 129 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm 3 11 2 Power Delay This page allows the user to setting the delay time of power providing after device rebooted Web Interface To Display Power Over Ethernet Status in the web interface 1 Click Configuration POE and Power delay 2 Enable the port to the power device 3 Specify the power providing delay time when reboot 4 Click Apply to apply the change Figure 3 11 2 The PoE Power Delay PoE Power Delay Home Power Delay Port Delay Mode Delay Time 0 300 sec v 0 1 Disable 0 2 Disable y 0 22 Disable M 0 23 Disable v 0 24 Disable M 0 Parameter description Power Supply Configuration Port This is the logical port number for this row Delay Mode Turn on off the power delay function Enabled Enable POE Power Delay Disabled Disable POE Power Delay Delay Time
100. E linked with powered device and supplying power to them SFP speed Green Yellow Green when SFP link is on 1Gbps Yellow when SFP link is on 100Mbps Connections Front Panel e e i i Z i 3 g D SS Se So ee LAN WAN User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 11 Rear Panel z Rack Mounting Front rack posts 89 Fi a P P Hardware Reset Mode Button The reset button is used to reboot the PoE switch or to restore the factory default settings Sometimes resetting the system can return the PoE switch to normal operation If the system problems remain after reset restore the factory settings and try again Reboot Press 3 10 seconds and release the recessed reset button Wait for the PoE Switch to reboot Reset to factory default Press gt 10 seconds and release the recessed reset button Wait for the PoE Switch to reset to factory default amp Reboot The mode button is use to switch LED indicator s mode Link ACT Speed Press lt 3 seconds and release the recessed mode button The Link ACT Speed LED will on Green when displaying Link ACT Speed status of Ethernet ports PoE Press lt 3 seconds and release the recessed mode button The PoE LED will on Green when displaying the PoE link status with powered devices User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 12 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm Operation of Web based Management Initial Configuration A I MPORTANT 1 Itis recommende
101. Emergency Call Service Policies Delete Policy ID Application Type Tag VLAN ID L2 Priority DSCP No entries present Add New Policy Parameter description Fast start repeat count Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general In addition it is best to advertise only those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types for example only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice capable devices both in order to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy With this in mind LLDP MED defines an LLDP MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol and the application layers on top of the protocol in order to achieve these related properties Initially a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU Only after an LLDP MED Endpoint Device is detected will an LLDP MED capable Network Connectivity Device start to advertise LLDP MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port The LLDP MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start within a second when a new LLDP MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP MED information as fast as possible to new neighbours Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during t
102. IP addresses Web Interface To Display DHCP Server Declined IP in the web interface Click DHCP Server and Declined IP Figure 4 4 1 3 The Declined IP DHCP Server Declined IP Home Declined IP Auto refresh C Declined IP Parameter description IP IP address allocated to DHCP client Type Type of binding Possible types are Automatic Manual Expired State State of binding Possible states are Committed Allocated Expired e Pool Name The pool that generates the binding ServerID Server IP address to service the binding User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 202 4 4 2 Snooping Table WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm This page display the dynamic IP assigned information after DHCP Snooping mode is disabled All DHCP clients obtained the dynamic IP address from the DHCP server will be listed in this table except for local VLAN interface IP addresses Entries in the Dynamic DHCP snooping Table are shown on this page Web Interface To monitor an DHCP in the web interface Click Monitor DHCP Snooping table Figure 4 4 2 The DHCP snooping table Dynamic DHCP Snooping Table Auto refresh Start from MAC address _00 00 00 00 00 00 Parameter description MAC Address User MAC address of the entry e VLANID VLAN ID in which the DHCP traffic is permitted Source Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed IP Address User IP address of the entry IP Subnet Mask
103. K comMm 22 Disabled 23 Disabled 24 Disabled 25 Disabled 26 Disabled Parameter description User Module Legend The legend shows all user modules that may request Port Security services User Module Name The full name of a module that may request Port Security services Abbr A one letter abbreviation of the user module This is used in the Users column in the port status table Port Status The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Port The port number for which the status applies Click the port number to see the status for this particular port Users Each of the user modules has a column that shows whether that module has enabled Port Security or not A means that the corresponding user module is not enabled whereas a letter indicates that the user module abbreviated by that letter see Abbr has enabled port security State Shows the current state of the port It can take one of four values Disabled No user modules are currently using the Port Security service Ready The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module and is awaiting frames from unknown MAC addresses to arrive Limit Reached The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should be taken in Shutdown The Port Security service i
104. LAN ID 102 VLAN ID 101 sr Router OTEK VAST station Intranet VLAN IDs 101 102 200 VLAN ID 200 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 310 WWW VvIVOoOTeEK com Web interface To configure Surveillance Topology View in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Graphic View gt Topology View 2 When selecting or moving to the location of a single device click on the bubble at listed on the Device List panel 3 To reveal details of a device mouse over a device to display its device name model name MAC IP and status 4 You can click on a device to display the quick access menu oe GS Device Management Link Re direct Link ey ee u Reboot X Device Status Opens a live view stream 1 For multi sensor w Live Stream models only channel 1 video stream will be displayed Device Name The quick access menu is also available on the Floor View and Google Map The Live Stream feature applies in the following browser versions Chrome Chrome Firefox v39 above V38 under v39 Yes Yes Yes You will also need to enable the QuickTime plug ins for your browser For example try using the chrome plugins command in your URL address field on Chrome User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 311 VIVOTEK WWW viv OT E EK C OM eoo J amp Plug in ms chrome plugins co Plug in 1 Plug in 6 Dettagli QuickTime Player Versione
105. M Disable NM Parameter description Port The Port coulmn shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egress settings Ingress In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual ports There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress 1 Translate To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox 2 Classify Classification for a port have 4 different values e Disable No Ingress DSCP Classification e DSCP 0 Classify if incoming or translated if enabled DSCP is 0 e Selected Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP Translation window for the specific DSCP e All Classify all DSCP User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 165 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Egress Port Egress Rewriting can be one of below parameters e Disable No Egress rewrite e Enable Rewrite enable without remapped e Remap DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the QoS Port DSCP information by manual User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 166 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 16 8 DSCP
106. MP packet goes The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only when the corresponding IPv6 interface is valid When the egress interface is not given PING6 finds the best match interface for destination Do not specify egress interface for loopback address Do specify egress interface for link local or multicast address Start Click the Start button then the switch will start to ping the device using ICMP packet size what set on the switch After you press 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs PING6 server 10 10 132 20 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 0 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 1 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 2 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 3 time Oms 64 bytes from 10 10 132 20 icmp_seq 4 time Oms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 274 5 2 Ping6 This section allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMPv6 PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMPv6 PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMPv6 PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 2 The I CMPv6 Ping ICM Pv6 Ping Home Pings IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ping Length 56 Ping Count 5
107. MSTP GVRP Combined Web Interface To Display VLAN Port Status in the web interface 1 Click Monitor VLAN Port Status 2 Specify the Static NAS MVRP MVP Voice VLAN MSTP GVRP Combined 3 Display Port Status information Figure 4 13 2 The VLAN Port Status for Static user VLAN Port Status for Combined users Home Beste Auto refresh aA Combined M Port Port Type Ingress Filtering Frame Type Port VLAN ID Tx Tag Untagged VLAN ID Conflicts 1 C Port All 1 Untag PVID No 2 C Port All 1 Untag PVID No 3 C Port All 1 Untag PVID No 4 C Port All 1 Untag PVID No 5 C Port All 1 Untag PVID No 6 C Port All 1 Untag PVID No 7 C Port All 1 Untag PVID No Parameter description VLAN USER VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID UVID Currently we support following VLAN User types CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Voice VLAN Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originating from IP phones MVR MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each VLAN Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single multicast VLAN MSTP The 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol MSTP uses VLANs to create multiple spanning trees
108. Mode of System Configuration 2 Checked Aging Enabled 3 Set Aging Period Default is 3600 seconds To configure a Port Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface Select Enabled in the Mode of Port Configuration Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses in the Limit of Port Configuration Set Ation Trap Shutdown Trap amp Shutdown Click Apply a lh Figure 3 5 2 1 The Port Security Limit Control Configuration Port Security Limit Control Configuration Home Limit Control System Configuration Mode Disabled Aging Enabled a Aging Period 3600 seconds Port Configuration Port Mode Limit Action State Re open lt gt M 4 dd 1 Disabled Y 4 None Disabled 2 Disabled W 4 None v Disabled 3 Disabled V 4 None iv Disabled 4 Disabled 4 None v Disabled User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 65 21 22 23 24 25 26 Disabled V _ Disabled Disabled Y Disabled Disabled Disabled V Apply Reset User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 None M None None None K Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled e vivor Reopen Reopen Reopen Reopen Reopen Reopen E E lt o 4 m I nl 0 m 66 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Parameter description System Configuration Mode Indicates if Limit Control is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally dis
109. N identifier as used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk based PSAP This format consists of a numerical digit string corresponding to the ELIN to be used for emergency calling Policies Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 124 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signalling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies a
110. Parameters 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 10 The DSCP Classification Configuration DSCP Classification Home DSCP Classification QoS Class DPL DSCP x v 0 0 o BE M 0 1 o BE M 1 0 o BE Y 1 1 o BE M 2 0 o Be M 2 1 BE M 3 0 o se M 3 o se M 4 0 O BE M 4 1 BE M 5 0 O BE M 5 1 O BE M 6 0 BE M 6 1 0 BE M 7 0 O BE M 7 1 o Be M Parameter description QoS Class User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 171 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Available QoS Class value ranges from 0 to 7 QoS Class 0 7 can be mapped to followed parameters DPL Drop Precedence Level 0 1 can be configured for all available QoS Classes DSCP Select DSCP value 0 63 from DSCP menu to map DSCP to corresponding QoS Class and DPL value Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the DSCP Classification information by manual User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 172 3 16 11 QoS Control List Configuration WwWwwW vIivoT uk oom The section shows the QoS Control List QCL which is made up of the QCEs Each row
111. Port Configuration Evoke to enable or disable the STP then scoll and evoke to set all parameters of the CIST normal Port configuration Click the apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 8 4 The STP CIST Port Configuration STP CIST Port Configuration Home CIST Port CIST Aggregated Port Configuration Restricted STP Auto BPDU Point to Port Enabled Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Edge Role TCN Guard point Auto ha 128 M Non Edge L Forced True M CIST Normal Port Configuration Restricted STP Auto BPDU Point to Port Enabled Path Cost Priority Admin Edge Edge Role TCN Guard point v com M n jojo y 1 Auto V 128M Non Edge M a i p Auto v 2 Auto 128 y Non Edge y C Auto wv 25 Auto y 128 M Non Edge M C C Auto v 26 Auto ba 128 M Non Edge Y C C Auto User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 109 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical STP port STP Enabled Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the ne
112. Retransmissions 0 Access Challenges 0 Pending Requests 0 Malformed Access Responses 0 Timeouts 0 Bad Authenticators 0 Unknown Types 0 Packets Dropped 0 Other Info IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 State Disabled Round Trip Time User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 Oms 223 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Responses Malformed Responses Bad Authenticators Unknown Types Packets Dropped Other Info IP Address State Round Trip Time Parameter description RADIUS Authentication Statistics Transmit Packets 0 Requests 0 0 Retransmissions 0 0 Pending Requests 0 0 Timeouts 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled Oms The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 RADIUS Authentication Client MIB Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for Packet Counters RADIUS authentication server packet counter There are seven receive and four transmit counters Direction Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx Rx TX Name Access Accepts Access Rejects Access Challenges Malformed Access Responses Bad Authenticato rs Unknown Types Packets Dropped Access Requests RFC4668 Name Description The number of RADIUS Access Accept packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Reject packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of RADIUS Access Challenge
113. S and performance Support Pv4 IPv6 dual stack management Support SSH SSL secured management Support SNMP v1 v2c v3 Support RMON groups 1 2 3 9 Support IGMP v1 v2 v3 Snooping Support RADIUS authentication Support IP Source Guard Support DHCP Snooping Support ACL and QCL for traffic filtering Support 802 1d STP 802 1lw RSTP and 802 1s MSTP Support LACP and static link aggregation Support Q in Q double tag VLAN Overview of this user s manual Chapter 1 Hardware Installation Chapter 2 Operation of Web based Management Chapter 3 System Configuration Chapter 4 Configuration Chapter 5 Security Chapter 6 Maintenance Chapter 7 Surveillance Management Surveillance users can start from this chapter Chapter 8 Surveillance Graphic View Chapter 9 Surveillance Network Chapter 10 Surveillance Monitor Chapter 11 Surveillance Diagnostics Chapter 12 Surveillance Maintenance User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 10 WWW VvIvoTeK comMm Hardware Installation Package Contents 1x Quick Installation Guide area LED Definitions peed selected by the Mode button PoE Green Lit Green when displaying the PoE link status with powered devices Below are the LEDs below the Ethernet and SFP ports Ethernet TP Speed Green Green when TP link is on 1000Mbps port LED Yellow Yellow when TP link is on 10 100Mbpx PoE Link ACT Green Green when Po
114. SNMP CONVENTIONS The following conventions are used throughout this manual to show information WARRANTY See the Customer Support Warranty booklet included with the product A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your Manufacture products and replacement parts can be obtained from your VIVOTEK Sales and Service Office authorized dealer Disclaimer VIVOTEK Inc does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and marks no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose VIVOTEK Inc disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of VIVOTEK Inc VIVOTEK Inc assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual VIVOTEK Inc makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
115. Security 4 5 1 Network 4 5 1 1 Port Security 4 5 1 1 1 Switch This section shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The status page is divided into two sections one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Security Network Port Security then Switch 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 5 1 1 1 The Port Security Switch Status Auto refresh el User Module Legend User Module Name Abbr Limit Control L 802 1X 8 DHCP Snooping D Port Status MAC Count Port Users State Current Limit 1 Disabled 2 Disabled 3 Disabled 4 Disabled User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 206 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeE
116. Speed Dome Network Camera 0002D12A4A34 192 168 5 68 C IP8362 IP8362 1 0002D12D07FD 192 168 5 69 O IP8335H Mega Pixel Network Camera 0002D12DFOF6 192 168 5 70 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 303 7 6 2 Config Import Web interface To configure Camera config in the web interface VIVOTEK WWW viv OT EKRK C OM 1 Click Surveillance gt Management gt Camera amp Encoder gt Camera Configure gt Config Import Select the Device to import the configuration file from i e client PC or the switch itself Select the IP camera to load the configuration file to using a single click on its checkbox Click the Apply button Figure 7 6 2 Config import Camera Config Import Import from ClientPc Y Select Model Name IP8337H IP8364 FD8134 PD8136 IP8362 IP8362 a a a I T hm IP8335H User Manual rev 1 AR RSE Device Name IP8337H IP8364 aabbcc PD8136 IP8362 1 Mega Pixel Network Camera Mega Pixel Network Camera 2 Aug 2015 MAC 0002D127B298 0002D12872E7 0002D128C9AB 0002D12964CF 0002D12D07FD 0002D12D08D4 0002D12DFOF6 Home Config Import IP Address 192 168 0 6 192 168 0 5 192 168 0 4 169 254 100 207 169 254 7 253 192 168 0 69 192 168 0 80 304 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm 7 6 3 Config Files Web interface To display configuration files currently stored on the switch 1 Click Surveillance gt Management gt Camera amp Encoder gt Camera Configure
117. User IP subnet mask of the entry DHCP Server Address DHCP Server address of the entry User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 Home Snooping Table VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page WWW VvIVvVoTeEK comMm 4 4 3 Detailed Statistics This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping Notice that the normal forward per port TX Statistics isn t increased if the incoming DHCP packet is done by L3 forwarding mechanism And clear the statistics on specific port may not take effect on global statistics since it gathers the different layer overview Web Interface To monitor an DHCP Relay statistics in the web interface Click Monitor DHCP Detailed Statistics Figure 4 4 3 The DHCP Detailed Statistics DHCP Detailed Statistics Port 1 Home Detailed Statistics Auto refresh Ea Ka Combined M Porti M Receive Packets Transmit Packets Rx Discover 0 Tx Discover 0 Rx Offer 0 Tx Offer 0 Rx Request 0 Tx Request 0 Rx Decline 0 Tx Decline 0 Rx ACK 0 Tx ACK 0 Rx NAK 0 Tx NAK 0 Rx Release 0 Tx Release 0 Rx Inform 0 Tx Inform 0 Rx Lease Query 0 Tx Lease Query 0 Rx Lease Unassigned 0 Tx Lease Unassigned 0 Rx Lease Unknown 0 Tx Lease Unknown 0 Rx Lease Active 0 Tx Lease Active 0 Rx Discarded Checksum Error 0 Rx Discarded from Untrusted 0 Parameter description Server Statistics Rx and Tx Discover The number of discover option 53 with value 1 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Offer The number of offer option 53 w
118. VvIVOoOTeEK comMm this SMAC value DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears DMAC Value When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is XX XX XX XX XX XX or XX XX XX XX XX XX Or XXXXXXXXXXXX X IS a hexadecimal digit A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear Remove All You can click them for refresh the ACL configuration or clear them by manual Others remove all to clean up all ACL configurations on the table User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 83 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 5 2 4 IP Source Guard The section describes to configure the IP Source Guard detail parameters of the switch You could use the IP Source Guard configure to enable or disable with the Port of the switch 2 5 2 4 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure IP Source Guard setting including Mode Enabl
119. WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK comMm 3 5 1 3 Authentication Method This page shows how to configure a user with authenticated when he logs into the switch via one of the management client interfaces Web Interface To configure a Authentication Method Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify the Client ssh web which you want to monitor 2 Specify the Authentication Method none local radius tacacs 3 Checked Fallback 4 Click Apply Figure 3 4 1 3 The Authentication Method Configuration Authentication Method Configuration Client Methods telnet local M no M no Y no Y ssh local y no M no M no y http local v no M no M no v Parameter description e Client The management client for which the configuration below applies Authentication Method Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values none authentication is disabled and login is not possible local use the local user database on the switch for authentication radius use a remote RADIUS server for authentication tacacs use a remote TACACS server for authentication Methods that involves remote servers are timed out if the remote servers are offline In this case the next method is tried Each method is tried from left to right and continues until a method either approves or rejects a user If a remote server is used for primary authentication it is recommended to configure secondary authentication as local This will enable
120. When a new Root password is applied the VIVOTEK camera will become a managed camera Web interface To configure Surveillance Un managed Devices Camera in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Management gt Unmanaged Devices gt Camera 2 Enter a Password blank also applies 3 Click the Apply button User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 306 VIVOTEK WWW VIY OTEK COM Figure 7 8 2 Surveillance Un managed Devices Camera Un managed Camera Home Camera 10 records per page Search Select Model Name MAC IP Address n Ei PD8136 00 02 D1 28 66 92 192 168 0 20 Showing 1 to 1 of 1 entries Administrator Username root Password Apply Parameter description Administrator Username Root system administrator default and cannot be changed Administrator Password The Root password that will be applied to the selected device s User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 307 WWW VvIvVvoOTeEK comMm GENGE Surveillance Graphic View 8 1 Topology View On this page you can take a glimpse of networked devices and network topology in a cluster of networks You can also configure a VLAN on a single switch or across multiple switches using the configurable options in the Topology View The Auto Sync Feature In a network deployment consisting of multiple surveillance switches you can select one switch as the root switch The rest of the PoE switches will become its subordinates and the VLAN QoS MAC Lock configurations will
121. a preferred direction i z Pan g Fa va ml ta n TAM fae Ci _ ca a a You can also configure VLAN grouping in the Topology View To configure grouping proceed with the following 1 Enable the Grouping mode by selecting the Group check circle from Device List menu Check circles will appear in front of every IP cameras When configuring a new group select New Group from the drop down list When configuring an existing group select an existing group 2 Select the members you prefer from the topology Select by checking their circles 3 Enter a Group name Description and a unique VLAN ID See the previous chapter for details VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A value of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead 4 When done click the Apply button for the configuration to take effect Click the Save button to save your configuration Figure 8 1 2 Configuring Grouping in the Topology View User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 313 VIVOTEK WWW viv OT EKRK C OM Topology Configuration BiHome gt GraphicMonitoring gt Topolog view F switch F pameenode P umn Fre P ems H Device List lt p Orom Oor Group Mame
122. a response Pending radiusAuthClientExtPendin This variable is incremented when an Requests gRequests Access Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of an Access Accept Access Reject Access Challenge timeout or retransmission The number of authentication timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may radiusAuthClientExtTimeout retry to the same server send to a different TX Timeouts server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout Tx Other Info This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name RFC4668 Name Description IP IP address and UDP port for the authentication server in Address question Shows the state of the server It takes one of the following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept access attempts Dead X seconds left Access attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one
123. abled other modules may still use the underlying functionality but limit checks and corresponding actions are disabled Aging Enabled lf checked secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period Aging Period If Aging Enabled is checked then the aging period is controlled with this input If other modules are using the underlying port security for securing MAC addresses they may have other requirements to the aging period The underlying port security will use the shorter requested aging period of all modules that use the functionality The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10 000 000 seconds To understand why aging may be desired consider the following scenario Suppose an end host is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch on which Limit Control is enabled The end host will be allowed to forward if the limit is not exceeded Now suppose that the end host logs off or powers down If it wasn t for aging the end host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward To overcome this situation enable aging With aging enabled a timer is started once the end host gets secured When the timer expires the switch starts looking for frames from the end host and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period the end host is assumed to be disconnected and the corresponding resources are freed on the switc
124. al is 100 in tenths of seconds 10 seconds LLQI LMQI for IGMP Last Member Query Interval The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by the Last Member Query Interval multiplied by the Last Member Query Count The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds default last member query interval is 10 in tenths of seconds 1 second URI Unsolicited Report Interval The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds default unsolicited report interval is 1 second Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh lt lt gt gt You can click them Refreshes the displayed table starting from the VLAN input fields Or click lt lt to update the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID Others click gt gt to update the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 117 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 10 LLDP The switch supports the LLDP For current information on your switch model The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP provides a standards based method for enabling switches to advertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about adjacent LLDP device
125. allowed range is 0 to 255 Trap Probe Security Engine ID Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Possible values are Enabled Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Trap Security Engine ID Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed When Trap Probe Security Engine ID is enabled the ID will be probed automatically Otherwise the ID specified in this field is used The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Trap Security Name Indicates the SNMP trap security name SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled Configure SNMP trap on this page System Enable disable that the Interface group s traps Possible traps are Warm Start Enable disable Warm Start trap Cold Start Enable disable Cold Start trap Interface Indicates that the Interface group s traps Possible traps are Indicates that the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps Possible modes are Link Up Enable disable Link up trap Link Down Enable disable Link down trap LLDP Enable disab
126. alue of 1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID A value of 0 Priority Tagged is used if the device is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 meaning that only the IEEE 802 1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is used instead Priority Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type One of the eight priority levels 0 through 7 DSCP DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 Contain one of 64 code point values 0 through 63 Auto negotiation Auto negotiation identifies if MAC PHY auto negotiation is supported by the link partner Auto negotiation status Auto negotiation status identifies if auto negotiation is currently enabled at the link partner lf Auto negotiation is supported and Auto negotiation status is disabled the 802 3 PMD Operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value rather than by auto negotiation Auto negotiation Capabilities Auto negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC PHY capabilities Buttons User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 253 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Auto refresh _ B Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page 4 10 3 PoE This page allows the user to inspect the current s
127. an be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 13 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com RADI US Assigned QoS Enabled When RADIUS Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled checked on a given port the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid traffic received on the supplicant s port will be classified to the given QoS Class If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a QoS Class or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QOS Class which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class Refer to the written documentation for a description of the RADIUS attributes needed in order to successfully identify a QoS Class The User Priority Table attribute defined in RFC46 75 forms the basis for identifying the QoS Class in an Access Accept packet Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered and to be valid it must follow this rule All 8 octets in the attribute s value mus
128. an overview of RMON Statistics entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Statistics table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Statistics table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table The Start from Control Index allows the user to select the starting point in the Statistics table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest Statistics table match The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To configure a RMON Statistics in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Click Security Switch RMON then Statistics 3 Checked Auto refresh 4 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 5 3 1 1 The RMON Statistics Status Overview RMON Statistics Status Overview Home Statistics Auto refresh A Start from Control Index 0 with 20 entries per page 65 128 256 512 1024 Source Broad Multi CRC Under Over 64 ID ifIndex Drop Octets Pkts cast cast Errors size size Frag Jabb Coll Bytes 127 255 511 1023 1588 No more entries Parameter description ID Indicates
129. and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 86 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 5 2 5 ARP Inspection The section describes to configure the ARP Inspection parameters of the switch You could use the ARP Inspection configure to manage the ARP table 3 5 2 5 1 Configuration This section describes how to configure ARP Inspection setting including Mode Enabled and Disabled Port Enabled and Disabled Web Interface To configure an ARP Inspection Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Click Apply Figure 3 4 2 6 1 The ARP Inspection Configuration ARP Inspection Configuration Home Port Configuration Mode Disabled M Translate dynamic to static Port Mode Configuration Port Mode Check VLAN Log Type lt gt Vv lt gt Vv lt gt Vv j M 1 Disabled V Disabled None M 2 Disabled Disabled None M 24 Disabled Disabled None M 25 Disabled Disabled None 26 Disabled Disabled None M Parameter description Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Port Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is ena
130. and video encoders can join a single VLAN Group Unmanaged devices refer to those protected by unknown root passwords which you do not have the access credentials User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 297 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm Parameter description Remove Select the checkbox and click Apply to remove an off Line device from the list An online device cannot be removed Status Device link state On Off Line Model Name NVR amp CMS model name Device Name NVR amp CMS device name Edit Device Name NVR amp CMS device name edit function MAC NVR amp CMS device MAC address IP Address NVR amp CMS device IP address It is also a hyper link that directly opens a web session with the device Version NVR amp CMS device software version Note that if the Auto refresh checkbox is selected the device status is refreshed by every 3 seconds If you want to Remove a detected device deselect the Auto refresh checkbox first User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 298 VIVOTEK WWW viv OT EKRK C OM 7 4 Camera amp Encoder This page displays the status of all IP Cameras and video servers currently connected to your switch as well as all the devices in the network that the switch can access Web interface To configure Surveillance Camera amp Encoder in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Management gt Camera amp Encoder gt Device List 2 Click B to configure the Ba
131. anslation 1 Translate DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of 0 63 DSCP values 2 Classify Click to enable Classification at Ingress side Egress There are following configurable parameters for Egress side 1 Remap DPO Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 2 Remap DP1 Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 There is following configurable parameter for Egress side e Remap Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap DSCP value ranges form 0 to 63 Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the DSCP Translation information by manual User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 170 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 16 10 DSCP Classification The section describes to teach user to configure and allows you to map DSCP value to a QoS Class and DPL value Others the settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the DSCP Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS DSCP Translation 2 Scroll to set the DSCP
132. art over Web Interface To configure a RMON Alarm Overview in the web interface 1 Specify Port which wants to check 2 Click Security Switch RMON then Alarm 3 Checked Auto refresh 4 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 5 3 1 3 RMON Alarm Overview RMON Alarm Overview Home Alarm Auto refresh aA Start from Control Index 0 with 20 entries per page Sample Startup Rising Rising Falling Falling ID Interval Variable Type Value Alarm Threshold Index Threshold Index No more entries Parameter description e ID Indicates the index of Alarm control entry Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold Variable Indicates the particular variable to be sampled Sample Type The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds e Value The value of the statistic during the last sampling period Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid Rising Threshold Rising threshold value User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 232 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm Rising Index Rising event index Falling Threshold Falling threshold value Falling Index Falling event index Buttons Auto refresh B Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to
133. arts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled Port State The current state of the port It can undertak
134. ass and DP level for tagged frames Enabled Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and or mapping NOTE This setting has no effect if the port is VLAN unaware Tagged frames received on VLAN unaware ports are always classified to the default CoS and DPL DSCP Based Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification Address Mode The IP MAC address mode specifying whether the QCL classification must be based on source SMAC SIP or destination DMAC DIP addresses on this port The allowed values are Source Enable SMAC SIP matching User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 152 WWWEVIiVva tT S Kk oaom Destination Enable DMAC DIP matching Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 153 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 16 2 Port Policing This section provides an overview of f QoS Ingress Port Policers for all switch ports The Port Policing is useful in constraining traffic flows and marking frames above specific rates Policing is primarily useful for data flows and voice or video flows because voice and video usually maintains a steady rate of traffic Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface Click Configuration QoS Port Policing 2 Evoke which port need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers and type th
135. ault config which is read only Select the file to download select the destination file on the target then click If the destination is running config the file will be applied to the switch configuration This can be done in two ways m Replace mode The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in the downloaded file m Merge mode The downloaded file is merged into running config If the file system is full i e contains the three system files mentioned above plus two other files it is not possible to create new files but an existing file must be overwritten or another deleted first Web Interface To download configuration in the web interface 3 Chick Browser to select Maintenance Configuration in you device 4 Click Download Select Figure 6 4 3 Configuration Download Download Configuration Home Download Select configuration file to save Please note running config may take a while to prepare for download File Name running config default config icon_list Download Configuration Parameter description Browse Click the Browse button to search the configuration text file and filename e Download Click the Download button then the switch will start to download the configuration from configuration stored location PC or Server User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 287 WWW VvIvoTeK comMm 6 4 4 Activate It is possible to activate any of the configuration f
136. ault is 128 Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values a a o Figure 3 8 3 The MSTI Configuration MSTI Configuration Home MSTI Priorities MSTI Priority Configuration MSTI Priority v CIST 32768 V MSTI1 32768 V MSTI2 32768 V MSTI3 32768 MSTI4 32768 V MSTI5 32768 V MSTI6 32768 V MSTI7 32768 V Parameter description MSTI The bridge instance The CIST is the default instance which is always active Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 108 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm 3 8 4 CIST Ports When you implement an Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance You need to configure the CIST Ports The section describes it allows the user to inspect the to inspect the current STP CIST port configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree CIST Ports parameters in the web interface i gt Click Configuration Spanning Tree CIST Ports Scroll and evoke to set all parameters of CIST Aggregated
137. ave changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 34 WWW VvIvoTeK comMm 3 4 1 3 Pool This page manages DHCP pools According to the DHCP pool DHCP server will allocate IP address and deliver configuration parameters to DHCP client Web Interface To configure DHCP server pool in the web interface 1 Click Configuration DHCP Server Pool 2 Click Add New Pool then you can create new Pool on the switch 3 Click Apply Figure 3 4 1 1 The DHCP server pool DHCP Server Pool Configuration Home Pool Pool Setting Delete Name Type IP Subnet Mask Lease Time Add New Pool DHCP Server Pool Configuration B Home Pool Pool Setting Delete Name Type IP Subnet Mask Lease Time 1 days 0 hours 0 minutes Add New Pool Parameter description Pool Setting Add or delete pools Adding a pool and giving a name is to create a new pool with default configuration If you want to configure all settings including type IP subnet mask and lease time you can click the pool name to go into the configuration page Name Configure the pool name that accepts all printable characters except white space If you want to configure the detail settings you can click the pool name to go into the configuration page Type Display which type of the pool is Network the pool defines a pool of IP addresses to service more than one DHCP client
138. ber Aggregation Group Configuration Port Members GrooupID 1 2 13 4 S 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 29 25 Noml Q GVOUGVsgVesgesgGgsIgsgesIgeIsVTIsaITeIIIIgeIVeIsaeIIgaIgIGYG 1 2 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 97 Static 26 11 12 13 Parameter description Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled Destination MAC Address The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Aggregation Group Configuration GroupID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port Port M
139. bled on this given port Possible modes are Enabled Enable ARP Inspection operation Disabled Disable ARP Inspection operation If you want to inspect the VLAN configuration you have to enable the setting of Check User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 87 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com VLAN The default setting of Check VLAN is disabled When the setting of Check VLAN is disabled the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting And the setting of Check VLAN is enabled the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the VLAN setting Possible setting of Check VLAN are Enabled Enable check VLAN operation Disabled Disable check VLAN operation Only the Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled and the setting of Check VLAN is disabled the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting There are four log types and possible types are None Log nothing Deny Log denied entries Permit Log permitted entries ALL Log all entries Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 88 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 5 2 5 2 Navigating the VLAN Configuration Each page shows up to 9999 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The
140. cess frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access Port based 802 1X In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The authenticator acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3 48 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is
141. ch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frames with the corresponding SMAC addresses have been seen after a configurable age time Web Interface To configure MAC Address Table in the web interface Aging Configuration 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Disable Automatic Aging and Aging Time 3 Click Apply MAC Table Learning 1 Click configuration 2 Specify the Port Members Auto Disable Secure 3 Click Apply Static MAC Table Configuration 1 Click configuration and Add new Static entry 2 Specify the VLAN IP and Mac address Port Members 3 Click Apply Figure 3 12 The MAC Address Table Configuration MAC Address Table Configuration Home MAC Table Aging Configuration Disable Automatic Aging C Aging Time 300 seconds MAC Table Learning Port Members 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Q 10 11 322 13 14 15 36 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Aat QOY9Vvgogoe9goedqgesgeqgeqgeqgegegegegegesgegesregesgoegegegegdgd Dd Disable Secure Static MAC Table Configuration Port Members Delete VLAN ID MAC Address 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Add New Static Entry Parameter description User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 135 Aging Configuration By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds This removal is also called agin
142. changeable depending on the mode in question Grayed out fields show the value that the port will get when the mode is applied Access Access ports are normally used to connect to end stations Dynamic features like Voice VLAN may add the port to more VLANs behind the scenes Access ports have the following characteristics e Member of exactly one VLAN the Port VLAN a k a Access VLAN which by default is 1 e accepts untagged frames and C tagged frames e discards all frames that are not classified to the Access VLAN e on egress all frames are transmitted untagged Trunk Trunk ports can carry traffic on multiple VLANs simultaneously and are normally used to connect to other switches Trunk ports have the following characteristics e By default a trunk port is member of all existing VLANs This may be limited by the use of Allowed VLANs e unless VLAN Trunking is enabled on the port frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of will be discarded e by default all frames but frames classified to the Port VLAN a k a Native VLAN get tagged on egress Frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get C tagged on egress e egress tagging can be changed to tag all frames in which case only tagged frames are accepted on ingress e VLAN trunking may be enabled Hybrid Hybrid ports resemble trunk ports in many ways but adds additional port configuration features In addition to the characteristics described for tr
143. ck Protocol based VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol and Group Name 3 Click Apply Figure 3 15 2 1 The Protocol to Group Mapping Table Protocol to Group Mapping Table B Home Protocol to Group Auto refresh E Protocol to Group Mapping Table Delete Frame Type Add New Entry Parameter description Delete Value Group Name Etype Ox 0800 To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 146 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OQUI OUI O
144. complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant NoTE Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server timeout is configured to X seconds using the AAA configuration page and suppose that the first server in the list is Currently down but not considered dead Now if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate faster than X seconds then it will never get authenticated because the switch will cancel on going backend authentication server requests whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant And since the server hasn t yet failed because the X seconds haven t expired the same server will be contacted upon the next backend authentication server request from the switch This scenario will loop forever Therefore the server timeout Should be smaller than the supplicant s EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate Single 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 12 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they real
145. conds Clear Clears the counters for the selected port Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 199 WWW VvIvoTeK comMm 4 4 DHCP 4 4 1 Server DHCP Server is used to allocate network addresses and deliver configuration parameters to dynamically configured hosts called DHCP client 4 4 1 1 Statistics This page displays the database counters and the number of DHCP messages sent and received by DHCP server Web Interface Display the DHCP server Statistics Overview in the web interface Click Protocol based VLAN configuration and add new entry Figure 4 4 1 1 The Protocol to Group Mapping Table DHCP Server Statistics Home Statistics Auto refresh C Database Counters Pool Excluded IP Address Declined IP Address 0 0 0 Binding Counters Automatic Binding Manual Binding Expired Binding 0 0 0 DHCP Message Received Counters DISCOVER REQUEST DECLINE RELEASE INFORM 0 0 0 0 0 DHCP Message Sent Counters OFFER ACK NAK 0 0 0 Parameter description Database Counters e Pool Number of pools Excluded IP Address Number of excluded IP address ranges Declined IP Address Number of seclined IP addresses Database Counters User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 200 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm Automatic Binding Number of bindings with network type pools Manual Binding Number of bindings that administrator assigns an IP address to a client That is the poo
146. could click refresh to update the counter or Clear the information Figure 3 5 2 3 1 The ACL Ports Configuration Port Policy ID 25 26 ACL Ports Configuration Home Ports Action Rate Limiter ID Port Redirect Mirror Logging Shutdown State Counter y 5 v Disabled i ee w lt gt v pa wv lt gt i Port 1 Port 2 Permit Disabled Disabled Qe Disabled M Disabled M Disabled M Enabled N 6678 Port 1 Port 2 Permit M Disabled w Disabled A Disabled M Disabled M Disabled M Enabled M 0 Port 1 v Port 2 Permit Disabled M Disabled A Disabled Disabled iv Disabled Enabled N 0 Port 1 Port 2 Permit Disabled Disabled A Disabled M Disabled w Disabled M Enabled N 0 Port 1 v Port 2 0 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 76 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply on this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 16 The default value is Disabled Port Redirect Select which port frames are redirected on The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number and it can t be set when action is
147. cross the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN Delete Check to delete the policy It will be deleted during the next save Policy ID ID for the policy This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices that shall be mapped to the specific ports Application Type Intended use of the application types 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy 3 Guest Vo
148. cters from 33 to 126 Destination Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y Z w And it also allow a valid hostname A valid hostname is a string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 dot dash Spaces are not allowed the first character must be an alpha character and the first and last characters must not be a dot or a dash Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 cdff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 1192 1 2 34 Destination port Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 65535 Trap Inform Mode Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation Trap Inform Timeout seconds User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 48 WWW VvIVOoOTeEK com Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Trap Inform Retry Times Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The
149. ction Table gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 93 WWW VvIvoTeK comMm 3 5 3 AAA This section shows you to use an AAA Authentication Authorization Accounting server to provide access control to your network The AAA server can be a TACACS or RADIUS server to create and manage objects that contain settings for using AAA servers 3 5 3 1 RADIUS Web Interface To configure a Common Configuration of AAA RADIUS in the web interface Figure 3 4 3 2 The RADIUS Authentication Server Configuration RADIUS Server Configuration Home gt Configuratic ty gt AAA gt RADIUS Global Configuration Timeout 5 seconds Retransmit 3 times Deadtime 0 minutes Key NAS IP Address NAS IPv6 Address NAS Identifier Server Configuration Delete Hostname Auth Port Acct Port Timeout Retransmit Key Add New Server Server Configuration Delete Hostname Auth Port AcctPort Timeout Retransmit Key lt gt 1812 1813 Add New Server Parameter description Global Configuration These setting are common for all of the RADIUS servers Timeout Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 1000 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 94 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com server before retransmitting the request Retransmit Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 1000 a RADIUS request is r
150. d RADIUS assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch Incoming traffic will be classified to and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature see RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned VLAN is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports Guest VLAN Enabled A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled on all ports e Guest VLAN ID This is the value that a port s Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is g
151. d from the server The number of RADIUS packets of radiusAccClientExtUnknownT unknown types that were received ypes from the server on the accounting port The number of RADIUS packets that radiusAccClientExtPacketsDr were received from the server on the opped accounting port and dropped for some other reason The number of RADIUS packets sent radiusAccClientExtRequests to the server This does not include retransmissions The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received a response This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented due to receipt of a Response timeout or retransmission The number of accounting timeouts to the server After a timeout the client may retry to the same server send to a different server or give up A retry to the same server is counted as a retransmit as well as a timeout A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well as a timeout radiusAcctClientExtBadAuthe nticators radiusAccClientExtRetransmi ssions radiusAccClientExtPendingRe quests radiusAccClientExtTimeouts This section contains information about the state of the server and the latest round trip time Name IP Address State RFC4670 Name Description IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question Shows the state of the server It takes one of th
152. d leave messages to the router side Port It shows the physical Port index of switch Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Fast Leave Enable the fast leave on the port Throttling Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 115 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 9 1 2 VLAN Configuration The section describes the VLAN configuration setting process integrated with IGMP Snooping function For Each setting page shows up to 99 entries from the VLAN table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest VLAN Table match Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IPMC IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration 2 Evoke to select enable or disable Snooping IGMP Querier Specify the parameters in the
153. d or priority tagged the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN If frames must be tagged on egress they will be tagged with a C tag S Port On ingress frames with a VLAN tag with TPID 0x8100 or Ox88A8 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag If a frame is untagged or priority tagged the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN If frames must be tagged on egress they will be tagged with an S tag S Custom Port On ingress frames with a VLAN tag with a TPID 0x8100 or equal to the Ethertype configured for Custom S ports get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag If a frame is untagged or priority tagged the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN If frames must be tagged on egress they will be tagged with the custom S tag Ingress Filtering Hybrid ports allow for changing ingress filtering Access and Trunk ports always have ingress filtering enabled If ingress filtering is enabled checkbox is checked frames classified to a VLAN that the port is nota member of get discarded If ingress filtering is disabled frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine However the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of VLAN Trunking Trunk and Hybrid ports allow for enabling VLAN trunking When VLAN trunking is enabled frames classified to unknown VLANs are accepted on the port whether ingress filtering is enabled
154. d to use 1E10 or IE11 to open a web console with the PoE switch 2 This PoE switch is specifically designed for surveillance applications It comes with an integrated Surveillance interface for ease of configuration The Surveillance interface is accessed through a tabbed menu and the configuration changes made in its window have a higher priority than those in the Switch configuration menus AW G Traffic Monitor Daith Sunred Lance AlW GEW 2EAA 185 Management IC WH mou dh Graphic Monitoring lt ziton S200 W i Pirni amp Maintenance v z 1400 haear gt Camera Upgrade Dik gt Camera Config i oom 1000 ll gt Floor image ou oe Device info to COV HON f Fired gt Security ou a 2 3 amp gt Trouble Shooting t Traffic Monitor Mega Pixel Network Camer gt Surveillance Config 106 Sc ou TOH eu 3 You should save the configuration changes made on the Surveillance menus before leaving the web page Otherwise your configuration changes will be lost The save button is located on the upper right corner of the screen Ae Trouble Shooting Home aintenance Trouble Shooting This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the AW GEV 264A through the web user interface With this facility you can easily access and monitor through any one port of the switch all the status of the switch including MIBs status each port activity Spanning tree status port aggregati
155. dd New Entry Parameter description Delete To delete a MAC based VLAN entry check this box and press save The entry will be deleted on the selected switch in the stack MAC Address Indicates the MAC address VLAN ID User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 144 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Indicates the VLAN ID Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC based VLAN entry To include a port in a MAC based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the MAC based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New MAC based VLAN Click to add a new MAC based VLAN entry An empty row is added to the table and the MAC based VLAN entry can be configured as needed Any unicast MAC address can be configured for the MAC based VLAN entry No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses are allowed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The MAC based VLAN entry is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save A MAC based VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new MAC based VLANs Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 145 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm 3 15 2 Protocol based VLAN This sec
156. done and the switch is rebooted without a prior Save operation this effectively resets the switch to default configuration Web Interface To delete configuration in the web interface 7 Chick Browser to select Maintenance Configuration in you device 8 Click Delete Select Figure 6 4 5 Delete Configuration Delete Configuration File Home Delete Select configuration file to delete File Name icon_list filename Delete Configuration File There is one system files 1 startup config The startup configuration for the switch read at boot time 2 Parameter description Buttons Delete Configuration Click the Delete button then the startup config file will be deleted this effectively resets the switch to default configuration User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 289 VIVOTEK WWW viv OT EKRK C OM Surveillance Management A I MPORTANT 1 Itis recommended to use 1E10 or 1E11 to open a web console with the PoE switch 2 This PoE switch is specifically designed for surveillance applications It comes with an integrated Surveillance interface for ease of configuration The Surveillance interface is accessed through a tabbed menu and the configuration changes made in its window have a higher priority than those in the Switch configuration menus Cc 192 168 6 149 1 bdrim_sy Sviverk AW GEV 264A 185 Surveillance Information Svettch Surveillance Surveillance Software Version 0116 Ma
157. dress as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form XX XX XX XX XX XX that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using the Port Security module Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard The advantage of MAC based authentication over port based 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The advantage of MAC based authentication over 802 1X based authentication is that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone Also only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The maximum number of clients that c
158. dresses will be removed from the port and no new address will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will remain shut down There are three ways to re open User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 67 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm the port 1 Boot the switch 2 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 3 Click the Reopen button Trap amp Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port both the Trap and the Shutdown actions described above will be taken State This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control s point of view The state takes one of four values Disabled Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port Ready The limit is not yet reached This can be shown for all actions Limit Reached Indicates that the limit is reached on this port This state can only be shown if Action is set to None or Trap Shutdown Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module This state can only be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap amp Shutdown Re open Button If a port is shutdown by this module you may reopen it by clicking this button which will only be enabled if this is the case For other methods refer to Shutdown in the Action section Note That clicking the reopen button causes the page to be refreshed so non committed changes
159. e following values Disabled The selected server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled Round Trip radiusAccClientExtRoundTripTime The time interval measured in milliseconds between User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 226 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Time the most recent Response and the Request that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn t been round trip communication with the server yet Buttons Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Clear Clears the counters for the selected server The Pending Requests counter will not be cleared by this operation User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 227 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm 4 5 3 Switch 4 5 3 1 RMON 4 5 3 1 1 Statistics This section provides
160. e Rate limit condition Scroll to select the Rate limit Unit with kbps Mbps fps and kfps 4 Click Apply to save the configuration Figure 3 16 2 The QoS Ingress Port Policers Configuration QoS Ingress Port Policers Home Port Policing Port Enabled Rate Unit Flow Control E so0 a 1 500 kbps M O 2 O so coos o 3 E 500 kbps V L 23 C 500 kbps M E 24 C 500 kbps v 25 500 kbps V L 26 E 500 kbps M L Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers e Enabled To evoke which Port you need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers function Rate To set the Rate limit value for this port the default is 500 e Unit To scroll to select what unit of rate includes kbps Mbps fps and kfps The default is kbps Flow Control If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode then pause frames are sent instead of discarding frames Buttons User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 154 WWWEVIiVvatTS Kk oaom Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 155 3 16 4 Port Schedulers WWW VvIvoTeK comMm This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Schedulers for all switch ports and the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflec
161. e Single 802 1X not an IEEE standard but a variant that features many of the same characteristics In Multi 802 1X one or more supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time Each supplicant is authenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module In Multi 802 1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant since that would cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch Instead the switch uses the supplicant s MAC address which is obtained from the first EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant An exception to this is when no supplicants are attached In this case the switch sends EAPOL Request Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination to wake up any supplicants that might be on the port The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality MAC based Auth Unlike port based 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC ad
162. e Unit 500 kbps vi Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Click on the port number in order to configure the schedulers Mode Shows the scheduling mode for this port Weight Qn Shows the weight for this queue and port Scheduler Mode Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority or Weighted on this switch port Queue Shaper Enable Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port Queue Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the queue shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Queue Shaper Excess User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 157 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Cont
163. e corresponding STP CIST and MSTI port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 113 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 3 9 IPMC ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions 3 9 1 IGMP Snooping The function is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to the member ports and in nature avoids wasting the bandwidth while IP multicast packets are running over the network This is because a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP Snooping cannot tell the multicast packet from the broadcast packet so
164. e is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange wakeup time information using the LLDP protocol EEE works for ports in auto negotiation mode where the port is negotiated to either 1G or 100 Mbit full duplex mode For ports that are not EEE capable the corresponding EEE checkboxes are grayed out and thus impossible to enable EEE for When a port is powered down for saving power outgoing traffic is stored in a buffer until the port is powered up again Because there are some overhead in turning the port down and up more power can be saved if the traffic can be buffered up until a large burst of traffic can be transmitted Buffering traffic will give some latency in the traffic Web Interface To configure a Port Power Saving Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Green Ethernet 2 Evoke to enable or disable the ActiPHY PerfectReach EEE and EEE Urgent Queues 3 Click Apply Figure 3 2 1 The Port Power Saving Configuration Port Power Savings Configuration Home Port Power Savings Optimize EEE for Latency v Port Configurat
165. e one of the following values Globally Disabled NAS is globally disabled Link Down NAS is globally enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is in Force Authorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is authorized Unauthorized The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single supplicant mode and the supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server X Auth Y Unauth The port is in a multi supplicant mode Currently X clients are authorized and Y are unauthorized Restart Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s Admin State is in an EAPOL based or MAC based mode Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication whenever the quiet period of the port runs out EAPOL based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will not cause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the clients on the port and thereby a reauthentication immediately The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is IN progress User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 19 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to und
166. e put in the queue DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE QoS Control Entry in the table using the following buttons Inserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list QX Moves the QCE down the list i Deletes the QCE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings Port Members Check the checkbox button in case you what to make any port member of the QCL entry By default all ports will be checked Key Parameters Key configuration are discribed as below Tag Value of Tag field can be Any Untag or Tag VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1 4095 or Any user can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs PCP Priority Code Point Valid value PCP are specific 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 or range 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 3 4 7 or Any DEI Drop Eligible Indicator Valid value of DEI can be any of values between 0 1 or Any SMAC Source MAC address 24 MS bits OUI or Any DMAC Type Destination MAC type possible values are unicast UC multicast MC broadcast BC or Any Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values 1 Any 2 Ethernet 3 LLC 4 SNAP 5 IPv4
167. e user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently displayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the I lt lt button to start over MAC Table Columns Switch stack only The stack unit where the entry is learned Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry VLAN User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 The VLAN ID of the entry 262 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm MAC address The MAC address of the entry e Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons wooren EAEE Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Clear Clears the counters for the selected port Refresh Click to refresh the page lt lt Updates the system log entries to the first available entry ID gt gt Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID NOTE 00 02 D1 73 01 29 your switch MAC address for IPv4 33 33 00 00 00 01 Destination MAC for IPv6 Router Adver
168. eK comMm Below is the example of using the VeriPHY function VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics tome Port Ally Cable Status Port PairA Length A Pair B Length B Pair C Length C Pair D Length D 1 OK 102 OK 102 102 102 2 OK 105 OK 105 102 _ 102 3 OK 51 OK 51 48 51 4 OK 102 OK 102 _ 102 102 5 Op 0 Op 0 Ope 0 Op 0 6 Op 0 Op 0 Op 0 Op 0 z Op 0 Op 0 Op 0 Op 0 8 Op 0 Op 0 Op 0 Op 0 9 OK 0 OK 0 OK 0 OK o OK Correctly terminated pair Open Open pair Short Shorted pair Short A Cross pair short to pair A Short B Cross pair short to pair B Short C Cross pair short to pair C Short D Cross pair short to pair D Cross A Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair A Cross B Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair B Cross C Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair C Cross D Abnormal cross pair coupling with pair D Length The length in meters of the cable pair The resolution is 3 meters User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 2 8 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 5 4 Traceroute This page allows you to issue ICMP TCP or UDP packets to diagnose network connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMPv6 PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify traceroute IP Address 2 Specify traceroute Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 4 The Traceroute Traceroute Home Traceroute Protocol ICMP B4 IP Address 0 0 0 0 Wait Time 1 60 i Max TTL 1 255 30 Probe Count 110 Start Parameter description e Pr
169. eaqamanntone anemaacsavapaevenueateoesesaseiweaasecs 10 CHAPTER 1 HARDWARE INSTALLATION ccccsssscssessessessesscscsecsessessssucseeseesesssscsesseeseessascaeeses 11 CHAPTER 2 OPERATION OF WEB BASED MANAGEMENT c ccccccsecccsececseseesecseneceeneeseneess 13 CHAPTERS SWHITCH SYSTEM CONFIGURATION wicccvccccsscceccsseeeecrennnsecessaxnssamnaesnetranbeentacenensatin 16 BE SV SUC g P A E AT E E N EAE E T A A AE E E 16 3 1 1 FO Bl OO liepeeaspan vans cemae poecteeosscun Ea aAa ven AS AEAEE AE aa AEAEE APNENA IEAS 16 E Me 2 AE ANE N A O AA P EE AES E N E E N ATE T E E A A 18 NTP a E T A S 21 Ne MIMS AAIE EA AE AIE E A marcia E E sides E A EA E A E IE AS 22 Fele IOS ara A E A A EE E AAE A 25 32 Green Ethe oscan AA 26 3 3 Ports CONTICUNALION sicececincaccecisiececurdsavsendentecauieravieupsiscsesnasdeseeeenbecesiucdedeessieeacuxtsevecedeutweectecauiesiwincsestasaene 28 S e A U n CS P E E N E I A E A A E ab amo A A E VAA pune senceneuebexieune uses 28 eee A CSCO OM T E A N AE E E E A A N E EN A S N AAAA A AN E 31 ADAP ea A E E E 32 S M E E t ANE A A NE AIENEA A A NEA T AE A AEN EIE A AEA AAE 32 O e a P T E T A P E E T O A O A E T E A T E T 32 SA l2 TX GIGS P esnea AEEA E EEEE E Ea 34 FEL FOO aa a E E E E EE EE 35 FAL NOOP IE e E T E E E A E EE 37 Jo SECUN Y iE sity eieenseneuincsseneoncunerianeisusenaoreiuinsees 39 eee e a ccs P OE ct TA PE AAE E reat E T OE T S OEE P E E E E 39 Fo U O oe aE EEE AE AE A AA E AEAN AAAA E A 39 sE AA
170. ed and Disabled Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited Web Interface To configure an IP Source Guard Configuration in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration 2 Select Enabled of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 3 Select Maximum Dynamic Clients 0 1 2 Unlimited of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration 4 Click Apply Figure 3 5 2 4 1 The IP Source Guard Configuration IP Source Guard Configuration Home Configuration Mode Disabled v Translate dynamic to static Port Mode Configuration Port Mode Max Dynamic Clients lt gt v lt gt wv 1 Disabled Unlimited M 2 Disabled W Unlimited v 24 Disabled Unlimited M 25 Disabled Unlimited M 26 Disabled Unlimited M Parameter description Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard All configured ACEs will be lost when the mode is enabled Port Mode Configuration Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port e Max Dynamic Clients User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 84 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port This value can be 0 1 2 or unlimited If the port mode i
171. ed as the search condition User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 305 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 7 8 Un managed Devices 7 8 1 IP Device If a device doesn t have DRM Client function e g PC NB or any IP devices the device will be listed as an Un managed Devices Web interface To configure Surveillance Un managed Devices IP devices in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Management gt Unmanaged Devices gt IP Device 2 Since a network can contain numerous devices you can remove devices that are not related to your surveillance deployment Figure 7 8 1 Un managed Device PC Un managed IP Device Fhir Autoreis a mm Siw qg T eniries Search Sekat Shabu Derice Mare fell DP ad dress E On Ling LE A JA AD Re Las Lost On Line OU SP DS BB Oe ee LS 168 8 102 E n Lina fa FGE ARSE T Lat 16A G Doe L fn Une OED RPSAP La 13216080 107 On Line W FEI ED M AF 122 166 LO z Cin Ling 3 15 Se Les Ae g 1921636103 E Of Ling O02 D S 1 6a 1921686 LO L Ce Line eS PEA BP fh 194160111 C ef Line Cie el Die aE 1321065 B n Ling PAB ST SAd Ai 197 1686116 Svoving 1 lo 10 of 50 entries E i d jant Parameter description Managed Change un managed device to the managed state for a selected device Remove Remove off Line devices from the current list of devices 7 8 2 Camera An Un managed VIVOTEK camera is one that comes with unknown Root password From this page you can force the change of Root password
172. ed stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Tag Remarking in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Tag Remarking Figure 3 16 6 The Port Tag Remarking QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Home Port Tag Remarking Port Mode Click the Port index to set the QoS Port Tag Remarking Classified QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Home Port Tag Remarking Po Port 1 Tag Remarking Mode M QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 amp Home Port Tag Remarking Port Port1 M Tag Remarking Mode Default PCP DEI Configuration Default PCP 0 v Default DEI oy User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 162 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking Port 1 Home Port Tag Remarking Port Port 1 M Tag Remarking Mode Mapped v QoS class DP level to PCP DEI Mapping Qos class DP level PCP DEI oN oN 0 0 iv 0 1 M 1 0 oly oM 1 1 oly iV 2 0 N oM 2 1 M M 3 0 M oM 3 1 M M j alv o 4 i al 1M 5 0 sv ofM s M 6 0 5v ov i a s 7 0 o 7 1 N iv Parameter description Mode Controls the tag remarking mode for this port Classified Use classified PCP DEI values Default Use default PCP DEI values Mapped Use mapped versions of QoS class and DP level PCP DEI Configuration Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 163
173. eens tea ssdpradebaasadieseadeyneeetsacodsvedaieesicenteudseeiaioiiwatenss 112 Be UNG OE E T swan ax valnnaonaienaaneieiensnaenawiaeasins A anc paauseas T mung nasenaean enon ser E 114 BANG IP SOG ONS a eretsactsacece see A A nneomenctescneneaacen sesnssaiaetasen A E 114 3 9 1 1 Basic COMMGUPAUOM socinsasceansenseaciaseiadannsnadads teaw ane UennduusasbavsmedaabetGeatbussdlasslenedsdenctaisuncdeastauedastledanens 114 OHO a2 NVLAN COMGUrAUO M esineen a E E E O ETES R 116 J IOLLDP oerna EAE EE N 118 5 101 LLDP COME Ura ON icones E G 118 3 10 2 LLDP MED Configuration sessseesessseeesssreresssereresssseressseeosssrecosssreccosssreeosssreresssrevsssreccresseeersssreressseeeees 121 BLU POE ares a E E E E EE EAN OEE totavepeneasenasaronteneeaereties 127 FELEO O a E E E E E E E E TO E E 127 LL POV or DEI eaa E EEEE E E E EA 130 FES a AE a E EE T EE EE E A A A EENE 131 3 11 4 A to Checking oc crpcay ve ssiscenctonoe aa tenn ssiaew sare tect areausoeoaeadteonosaieusnns denaudencateeobaateorssdeupenndaarovecatyaeasedercorsanseeocumeeiaen 133 32 MAC FANG citsrs cay cavauicosaweawasw E TEE savenes ts cen OE pe E EOE aedawunnaeesseceretaes 135 3 13 VUANS acinar eran anwweuane sansa venues ENN 137 3 14 Private LANG soocscrcescecenct dente cei eecen E E EE 141 PATAN MENE S I arsjpcteaenct secse caisetse ea rasateneeca ATE E EE ORE T E AA 141 FAPTE OUO nae E TEA N E E E EE ET 143 eie a E P E S E AE E E E E S AE A A ET 144 3 15 11 MAC ased VLAN sacarecateea
174. eeseneetens 290 7 Litoral ON nannaa eae 291 P a a E E E A TAA segs E E E E E E AE E E E A E E E eats 295 TF NVR Ge CMS DEVICE ciiisean a EE NNa 297 7 4 Camera S ENC OC CU siciiiiiniacsrerinninni ineei aana aE aS OEEO rE iaaiiai 299 7S5 Comers STAGE nE E nce denetesenetesseedenecneees 302 TA eC a A E N E E E E N E E E E E E a oute 303 76L COMME EXPO ossia a EE a a dacoaeia 303 TCE O E E A EAA E OE T 304 Fe N E ern a EE E EAE A 305 TETEE S o a PA AE E EE EE A E E E E E E EEN EE EE E EEE E E 305 7 8 Un managed DeviCceS sesesesececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececessoecscscsoecsoeoseeoe 306 De APDE a E A E E E E nvascedeerecetaecacoateceasancedearsee 306 CHAPTER 8 SURVEILLANCE GRAPHIC VIEW seeseseessseereeeressenssessrensressersrersressressresressreeseens 308 8 1 TOD OIO BY VIEW ics cnscces ese ceces i E N A OOA AOR 308 BA GOO RIE NaP ssrroia aE 319 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 1 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com CHAPTER 9 SURVEILLANCE NET W ORK crveincsssasaceencesnnsssravnvestebomanesasseeoacsineasrauavseas 321 OE SOCULIEY AEE A AT E E A N A EAEE A EE O A E A E T T E 321 9 2 GrOUPIN E snini eusgwis veut vonnesunsenssawiweneisuseavduwrecwensGes 322 CHAPTER 10 SURVEILLANCE MONITOR 1 cece ceccceescnccensseeseeeseeuseensseeeseeeseeuseenseees 324 POU nia oL E a y a T E E A T AOE E EE E eucabencencuseacacesueseeue A A 324 10 2 instant Throughput ecnin EES A E 325 CHAPTER 11 SURVEILLANCE DI
175. efined in this class include LAN configuration device location network policy power management and inventory management E LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II The LLDP MED Media Endpoint Class II definition is applicable to all endpoint products that have IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class Class and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to Voice Media Gateways Conference Bridges Media Servers and similar Discovery services defined in this class include media type specific network layer policy discovery LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III The LLDP MED Communication Endpoint Class III definition is applicable to all endpoint products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class and Media Endpoint Class Il classes and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include but are not limited to end user communication appliances such as IP Phones PC based softphones or other communication appliances that directly support the end user Discovery services defined in thi
176. eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol r1 IS a Special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It can also represent a legally valid Pv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Buttons These buttons are displayed on the NTP page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 21 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 1 4 Time The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP Manual setting is simple and you just input Year Month Day Hour and Minute within the valid value range indicated in each item Web Interface To configure Time in the web interface 1 Click Configuration System and Time 2 Specify the Time parameter 3 Click Apply Figure 3 1 4 The time configuration Time Configuration Time Configuration Clock Source Use Local Settings System Date 2011 01 01 01 04 59 yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Time Zone Configuration Time Zone None Acronym 0 16 characters User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 22 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Daylight Saving Time Configuration Daylight Saving Time Disabled M Start Time settings Month Jan V Date 1 M Year 2000 Hours M Minu
177. election When the Querier address is not set system uses IPv4 management address of the IP interface associated with this VLAN When the IPv4 management address is not set system uses the first available IPv4 management address Otherwise system uses a pre defined value By default this value will be 192 0 2 1 Compatibility Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network The allowed selection is IGMP Auto Forced IGMPv1 Forced IGMPv2 Forced IGMPv3 default compatibility value is IGMP Auto PRI Priority of Interface It indicates the IGMP control frame priority level generated by the system These values can be used to prioritize different classes of traffic The allowed range is O best effort to 7 highest default interface priority value is O Robustness Variable The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a network The allowed range is 1 to 255 default robustness variable value is 2 Query Interval The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds default query interval is 125 seconds QORI Query Response Interval The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into the periodic General Queries The allowed range is O to 31744 in tenths of seconds default query response interv
178. embers Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group Only full duplex ports can join an aggregation and ports must be in the same speed in each group Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 98 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm 3 6 2 LACP This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well An LACP trunk group with more than one ready member ports is a real trunked group An LACP trunk group with only one or less than one ready member ports is not a real trunked group Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation LACP parameters in the web interface 1 2 on Click Configuration LACP Configuration Evoke to enable or disable the LACP on the port of the switch Scroll the Key parameter with Auto or Specific Default is Auto Scroll the Role with Active or Passive Default is Active Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 2 The LACP Port Configuration LACP Port Configuration Home LACP Port LACP Enabled Key Role Timeout Prio
179. en the device will restart No Click to undo any restart action User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 280 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 6 2 Factory Defaults This section describes how to reset the Switch configuration to Factory Defaults Any configuration files or scripts will recover to factory default values Web Interface To configure a Factory Defaults Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Factory Defaults 2 Click Yes Figure 6 2 1 The Factory Defaults Factory Defaults Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults 73 Parameter description Buttons Yes Click to Yes button to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults No Click to to return to the Port State page without resetting the configuration User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 281 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 6 3 Firmware This section describes how to upgrade Firmware The Switch can be enhanced with more value added functions by installing firmware upgrades 6 3 1 Download This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Web Interface To configure a Firmware Upgrade Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select Maintenance Software in you device 2 Click Download Figure 6 3 1 The firmware Download Software Upload Firmware File _ Force Cool Restart Parameter description Browse Click the Browse button to search the Firmware URL and fil
180. enable or disable which Global configuration 3 Evoke which port wants to become a Router Port or enable disable the Fast Leave function 4 Scroll to set the Throtting parameter 5 Click the apply to save the setting 6 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 9 1 1 The I GMP Snooping Configuration IGMP Snooping Configuration Home Basic Configuration Global Configuration Snooping Enabled Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding Enabled IGMP SSM Range 232 0 0 0 e Leave Proxy Enabled Proxy Enabled User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 114 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Port Related Configuration Port Router Port Fast Leave Throttling O O gt M 1 o go ii 2 LJ LJ untimited O o tite 24 o 0 untimited 25 E O unlimited Y 26 O go unlimited Y Parameter description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Unregistered I PMCv4 Flooding enabled Enable unregistered I PMCVv4 traffic flooding IGMP SSM Range SSM Source Specific Multicast Range allows the SSM aware hosts and routers run the SSM service model for the groups in the address range Format IP address sub mask Leave Proxy Enable Enable IGMP Leave Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leave messages to the router side Proxy Enabled Enable IGMP Proxy This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join an
181. ename Note This page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch Uploading software will update all managed switches to the location of a software image and click After the software image is uploaded a page announces that the firmware update is initiated After about a minute the firmware is updated and all managed switches restart the switch restarts WARNING While the firmware is being updated Web access appears to be defunct The front LED flashes Green Off with a frequency of 10 Hz while the firmware update is in progress Do not restart or power off the device at this time or the switch may fail to function afterwards User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 282 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 6 3 2 Software Image Select This page provides information about the active and alternate backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the alternate image The web page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware images Note 1 In case the active firmware image is the alternate image only the Active Image table is shown In this case the Activate Alternate Image button is also disabled 2 If the alternate image is active due to a corruption of the primary image or by manual intervention uploading a new firmware image to the device will automatically use the primary image slot and activate this 3 The firmware version and date information may be empty
182. entry will be deleted during the next Save Hostname The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server Auth Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for authentication Acct Port The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for accounting Timeout This optional setting overrides the global timeout value Leaving it blank will use the global timeout value Retransmit This optional setting overrides the global retransmit value Leaving it blank will use the global retransmit value Key This optional setting overrides the global key Leaving it blank will use the global key Adding a New Server User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 95 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Click to add a new RADIUS server An empty row is added to the table and the RADIUS server can be configured as needed Up to 5 servers are supported The button can be used to undo the addition of the new server Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 96 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 6 Aggregation The Aggregation is used to configure the settings of Link Aggregation You can bundle more than one port with the same speed full duplex and the same MAC to be a single logical port thus the logical port aggregates the bandwidth of these ports This means you can apply your current Ethernet equipment s to build the bandwidth aggregation For
183. eset SNMPv3 Access Configuration Delete Group Name C default_ro_group default_rw_group default_ro_group Delete Add New Entry Parameter description Delete Security Model any any Security Model any any any Security Level NoAuth NoPriv NoAuth NoPriv Security Level NoAuth NoPriv NoAuth NoPriv NoAuth NoPriv ha If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset Home Read View Name default_view v default_view M B Home Read View Name default_view default_view V None Vv Access Write View Name None default_view M Access Write View Name None Vv default_view None Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 56 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Any security model accepted v1 v2c usm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth N
184. esh _ fa Private VLAN Membership Configuration Port Members Delete PVLAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 ID L 1 Add New Private VLAN Parameter description Delete To delete a private VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted during the next save e PVLANID Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other stack switch units but with no port members The check box is greyed out when VLAN is displayed on other stacked switches but user can add member ports to it A VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 141 WUW viv oTEK COM The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev
185. ess a network through Port A this time but through Port B the next time If Port A and Port B belong to different VLANs the device will be assigned to a different VLAN the next time it accesses the network As a result it will not be able to use the resources in the old VLAN On the other hand if Port A and Port B belong to the same VLAN after terminal devices access the network through Port B they will have access to the same resources as those accessing the network through Port A do which brings security issues To provide user access and ensure data security in the meantime the MAC based VLAN technology is developed MAC based VLANs group VLAN members by MAC address With MAC based VLAN configured the device adds a VLAN tag to an untagged frame according to its source MAC address MAC based VLANs are mostly used in conjunction with security technologies such as 802 1X to provide secure flexible network access for terminal devices Web Interface To configure MAC address based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLC MAC based VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the MAC address and VLAN ID 3 Click Apply Figure 3 15 1 The MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration MAC based VLAN Membership Configuration Home MAC based VLAN Auto refresh Ea Port Members Delete MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Currently no entries present A
186. etransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead Deadtime Deadtime which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than O zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured Key The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the RADIUS server and the switch NAS I P Address Attribute 4 The IPv4 address to be used as attribute 4 in RADIUS Access Request packets If this field is left blank the IP address of the outgoing interface is used NAS I Pv6 Address Attribute 95 The IPv6 address to be used as attribute 95 in RADIUS Access Request packets If this field is left blank the IP address of the outgoing interface is used NAS I dentifier Attribute 32 The identifier up to 255 characters long to be used as attribute 32 in RADIUS Access Request packets If this field is left blank the NAS ldentifier is not included in the packet Server Configuration The table has one row for each RADIUS server and a number of columns which are Delete To delete a RADIUS server entry check this box The
187. eviously saved values NTP Mode Enable or disable the NTP time server function Server Enter the addresses of one or multiple time servers The entry field Supports both domain name and IP address Note that the time zone setting in the Management Information Time Manual page should be properly configured when you enable the NTP server setting 7 3 NVR amp CMS Device You can identify the system by configuring switch contact information name and location Web interface To configure Surveillance NVR amp CMS on the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Management gt NVR amp CMS 2 Make configuration changes and click the Apply button Figure 7 3 1 Surveillance NVR amp CMS NVR amp CMS Device Auto refresh O E a4 li 9 a2 ON LINE OFF LINE MANAGED UN MANAGED Show 4 v entries O Remove Status Model Name Device Name MAC IP Address O Off Line ND8422P 00 02 D1 C4 24 17 169 254 11 235 a Off Line VAST 34 E6 D 2E 91 70 192 168 6 104 A Off Line VAST EC F4 BB 50 31 DA 192 168 6 128 On Line VAST 20 CF 30 54 51 A 7 192 168 6 205 On Line VAST 20 CF 30 42 41 05 192 168 6 213 On Line ST7501 O0 21 70 CA SE 7F 192 168 6 225 Showing 1 to 6 of 6 entries IMPORTANT The surveillance switch automatically discovers all devices in the local area network and there are differences for these devices in terms of VLAN configurations 1 NVR and CMS stations can join multiple VLAN Groups 2 Each of the IP cameras
188. evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 4 8 2 The STP Port status STP Port Status Auto refresh _ A CIST Role DesignatedPort Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Parameter description User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 Port The switch port number of the logical STP port CIST Role CIST State Forwarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding Discarding B Home Port Status Uptime Od 04 16 47 The current STP port role of the CIST port The port role can be one of the following values AlternatePort Backup Port RootPort DesignatedPort Disabled CIST State The current STP port state of the CIST port The port state can be one of the following values Blocking Learning Forwarding Uptime The time since the bridge port was last initialized Buttons Auto refresh B Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page 243 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 4 8 3 Port Statistics After you complete the STP configuration then you could to let the switch display the STP Statistics The Section provides you to ask switch to display the STP Statistics detail counters of bridge ports in the currently selected switch Web Interface To dis
189. example if there are three Fast Ethernet ports aggregated in a logical port then this logical port has bandwidth three times as high as a single Fast Ethernet port has 3 6 1 Static Ports using Static Trunk as their trunk method can choose their unique Static GroupID to form a logic trunked port The benefit of using Static Trunk method is that a port can immediately become a member of a trunk group without any handshaking with its peer port This is also a disadvantage because the peer ports of your static trunk group may not know that they should be aggregate together to form a logic trunked port Using Static Trunk on both end of a link is strongly recommended Please also note that low speed links will stay in not ready state when using static trunk to aggregate with high speed links Web Interface To configure the Trunk Aggregation Hash mode and Aggregation Group in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Aggregation Static and then Aggregation Mode Configuration 2 Evoke to enable or disable the aggregation mode function Evoke Aggregation Group ID and Port members 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 6 1 The Aggregation Mode Configuration Aggregation Mode Configuration Home Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Num
190. f no MAC address is currently selected To populate the table select one of the attached MAC Addresses from the table below Attached MAC Addresses Identity Shows the identity of the supplicant as received in the Response Identity EAPOL frame Clicking the link causes the supplicant s EAPOL and Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no supplicants are attached it shows No supplicants attached This column is not available for MAC based Auth MAC Address For Multi 802 1X this column holds the MAC address of the attached supplicant For MAC based Auth this column holds the MAC address of the attached client Clicking the link causes the client s Backend Server counters to be shown in the Selected Counters table If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached e VLAN ID This column holds the VLAN ID that the corresponding client is currently secured through the Port Security module State The client can either be authenticated or unauthenticated In the authenticated state it is allowed to forward frames on the port and in the unauthenticated state it is blocked As long as the backend server hasn t successfully authenticated the client it is unauthenticated If an authentication fails for one or the other reason the client will remain in the unauthenticated state for Hold Time seconds User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 214 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Last Authentica
191. f the History table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest History Index and Sample Index found in the History table The Start from History Index and Sample Index allows the user to select the starting point in the History table The Start from History Index and Sample Index allows the user to select the starting point in the History table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest History table match The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To configure a RMON history Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which wants to check 2 Click Security Switch RMON then History 3 Checked Auto refresh 4 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 4 5 3 1 2 RMON History Overview RMON History Overview Home History Auto refresh _ e Start from Control Index 0 and Sample Index 0 with 20 entries per page Sample Sample Broad Multi CRC Under Over Index Start Drop Octets Pkts cast cast Errors size size Frag Jabb Coll Utilization No more entries Parameter description History I ndex Indicates the index of History control entry Sample Index Indicates the index of the data ent
192. f the switch Web Interface To display the detailed log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Monitor System and Detailed Log 2 Display the log information Figure 4 1 4 The Detailed System Log Information Detailed System Log Information Home gt Monitor gt System gt Detailed Log Bong ID 1 Message Level Warning Time 2011 01 01T00 14 29 00 00 Message Link up on port 1 Parameter description e ID The ID gt 1 of the system log entry Message The detailed message of the system log entry Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the system log or clear them by manual others for next up page or entry Buttons Doone Refresh Updates the system log entries starting from the current entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entries to the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entry to the previous available entry ID gt gt Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID gt gt Updates the system log entry to the last available entry ID User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 189 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 4 2 Green Ethernet 4 2 1 Port Power Savings This page provides the current status for EEE Web Interface To display the power Saving in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Port Power Savings Figure 4 2 1 The Ports States Port Power Savings Status amp Home Port Power Savings Auto refresh J Port L
193. first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table The VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next VLAN Table match The will use the next entry of the currently displayed VLAN entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the warning message is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Web Interface To configure a VLAN Mode Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the VLAN ID Log Type 3 Click Apply Figure 3 4 2 6 2 The VLAN Mode Configuration VLAN Mode Configuration Home VLAN Configuration 16 gt Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Delete VLAN ID Log Type Add New Entry VLAN Mode Configuration Home VLAN Configuration ajej Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Delete VLAN ID Log Type 3 None Add New Entry Parameter description VLAN Mode Configuration Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which VLANs First you have to enable the port setting on Port mode configuration web page Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port Second you can specify which VLAN will be inspected on VLAN mode configuration web page The log type also can be configured on per VLAN setting User Manual re
194. following modes are Supported e From any DHCP interfaces The first DNS server offered from a DHCP lease to a DHCP enabled interface will be used e No DNS server No DNS server will be used e Configured Explicitly provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation e From this DHCP interface Specify from which DHCP enabled interface a provided DNS server should be preferred DNS Proxy When DNS proxy is enabled system will relay DNS requests to the currently configured DNS server and reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the network IP Interfaces Delete Select this option to delete an existing IP interface e VLAN The VLAN associated with the IP interface Only ports in this VLAN will be able to access the IP interface This field is only available for input when creating an new interface IPv4 DHCP Enabled Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If this option is enabled the system will configure the IPv4 address and mask of the interface using the DHCP protocol The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup IPv4 DHCP Fallback Timeout The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP lease After this period expires a configured IPv4 address will be used as IPv4 interface address A value of zero disables the fallback mechanism such that DHCP will keep retrying until a valid lease is obtained Legal values are 0 to 4294967295 seco
195. from the DHCP Server mode configuration page Mode Indicate the the operation mode per VLAN Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP server per VLAN Disabled Disable DHCP server pre VLAN Buttons Add VLAN Range Click to add a new VLAN range Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 33 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm 3 4 1 2 Excluded IP This page configures excluded IP addresses DHCP server will not allocate these excluded IP addresses to DHCP client Web Interface To configure DHCP server excluded IP in the web interface 1 Click Configuration DHCP Server Excluded IP 2 Click Add IP Range then you can create new IP Range on the switch 3 Click Apply Figure 3 4 1 2 The DHCP server excluded IP DHCP Server Excluded IP Configuration Home Excluded IP Excluded IP Address Delete IP Range Add IP Range DHCP Server Excluded IP Configuration Home Excluded IP Excluded IP Address Delete IP Range i Add IP Range Parameter description IP Range Define the IP range to be excluded IP addresses The first excluded IP must be smaller than or equal to the second excluded IP BUT if the IP range contains only 1 excluded IP then you can just input it to either one of the first and second excluded IP or both Buttons Add IP Range Click to add a new excluded IP range Apply Click to s
196. g Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds for example Age time seconds The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds fa Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking Disable automatic aging MAC Table Learning If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out another module is in control of the mode so that it cannot be changed by the user An example of such a module is the MAC Based Authentication under 802 1X Each port can do learning based upon the following settings Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received e Disable No learning is done Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped Note Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The maximum of 64 entries is for the whole stack and not per switch The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry MAC Address The MAC address of the entry
197. g 2015 181 WWWEVIiVva tT S Kk oaom values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 182 WWW VvIvVvoTeK comMm SEGA OWitch Monitor This chapter describes all of the basic network statistics which includes the Ports Layer 2 network protocol e g NAS ACL DHCP AAA and RMON etc and any setting of the Switch 4 1 System After you login the switch shows you the system information This page is default and tells you the basic information of the system including Model Name System Description Contact 7 13 Location System Up Time Firmware Version Host Mac Address Device Port With this information you will know the software version used MAC address serial number how many ports good and so on This is helpful while malfunctioning 4 1 1 Information The switch system information is provided here Web interface To configure System Information in the web interface Click Monitor System and Information 2 Check the contact information for the system administrator as well as the name and location of the switch Also indicate the local time zone by configuring the appropriate offset 3 Click the Refresh Figure 4 1 1 System Information System Information Home gt Monitor gt System gt Information Model Name System Description 24xGE PoE 2xGE Combo SFP VivoCam Managed Switch Location VIVOTEK Contact System Name AW GEV 264A 180 System Date 2011
198. g new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table Specify the Port VLAN ID MAC address and IP address for the new entry Click Save Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 91 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm values 3 5 2 5 4 Dynamic Table Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by MAC address and then by IP address Navigating the ARP Inspection Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table The Start from port address VLAN MAC address and IP address input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP Inspection Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the
199. g to The allowed String length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view types are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded In general if a view entry s view type is excluded there should be another view entry existing with view type as included and it s OID subtree should overstep User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 99 the excluded view entry OID Subtree WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk 2 5 1 6 7 Access The function is used to configure SNMPv3 accesses The Entry index key are Group Name Security Model and Security level To create a new access account please check lt Add new access gt button and enter the access information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 14 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Access in the web interface Click Apply Ce eS Click SNMP Accesses Click Add new Access Specify the SNMP Access parameters Figure 3 5 1 6 7 The SNMP Accesses Configuration SNMPv3 Access Configuration Delete Group Name default_ro_group default_rw_group Add New Entry Apply R
200. ged Ports No ports enabled or no existing partners Parameter description e AggriD The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID Last changed The time since this aggregation changed Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch The format Is Switch ID Port Buttons Auto refresh Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 236 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 4 6 2 Port Status This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a Port Status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Monitor LACP Port Status 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the LACP Port Status Figure 4 6 2 The LACP Status LACP Status Home Port Status Auto refresh _ A Partner Partner Partner Port LACP Key Aggr ID System ID Port Prio 1 No 2 No 3 No lt No 23 No 24 No 25 No 26 No Parameter description Port
201. gic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner Mirror Configuration is to monitor the traffic of the network For example we assume that Port A and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port respectively thus the traffic received by Port B will be copied to Port A for monitoring Web Interface To configure the Mirror in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Mirroring 2 Scroll to select Port to mirror on which port 3 Scroll to disabled enable TX Only and RX Only to set the Port mirror mode 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 17 The Mirror Configuration Mirror Configuration Home Mirroring Port to mirror to Disabled M Mirror Port Configuration Port 25 26 CPU Mode j Disabled ha Disabled ba Disabled ha Disabled M Disabled M D sabled V Disabled User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 179 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm Parameter description Portto mirroron Port to mirror also known as the mirror port Frames from ports that have either source rx or destination tx mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port Disabled disables mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same
202. guration the following conflicts can occur Functional Conflicts between features Conflicts due to hardware limitation Direct conflict between user modules Buttons Auto refresh _ B Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Combined Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 267 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 4 14 VCL 4 14 1 MAC based VLAN This section shows MAC based VLAN entries configured by various MAC based VLAN users Currently we support following VLAN User types CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as static NAS NAS provides port based authentication which involves communications between a Supplicant Authenticator and an Authentication Server Web Interface To Display MAC based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click Monitor MAC based VLAN Status 2 Specify the Static NAS Combined 3 Display MAC based information Figure 4 14 1 The MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static Home MAC based VLAN Auto refresh A Static M Port Members MAC Address VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 No data exists for the user Parameter description MAC Address Indicates the MAC address e VLANID Indicates the VLAN ID e Port Members Port members of the MAC based VLAN entry Buttons A
203. h A Start from Control Index 0 and Sample Index 0 with 20 entries per page Event Index Logindex LogTime LogDescription No more entries Parameter description Event Index Indicates the index of the event entry Log Index Indicates the index of the log entry LogTime Indicates Event log time e LogDescription Indicates the Event description Buttons Auto refresh _ B Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Event Table i e the entry with the lowest Event Index and Log Index User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 234 WUW viv oTEK COM gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 235 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK comMm 4 6 LACP 4 6 1 System Status This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it provides a status overview for all LACP instances Web Interface To display the LACP System status in the web interface 1 Click Monitor LACP System Status 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 6 1 The LACP System Status LACP System Status Home System Status Auto refresh a Partner Partner Partner Last Local Aggr ID System ID Key Prio Chan
204. h Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Port The port number to which the configuration below applies Mode Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port Both this and the Global Mode must be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect Notice that other modules may still use the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port e Limit The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port This number cannot exceed 1024 If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses e Action If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions None Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action Trap If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port send an SNMP trap If Aging is disabled only one SNMP trap will be sent but with Aging enabled new SNMP traps will be sent every time the limit gets exceeded Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC ad
205. he configured Group Name to a VLAN for the switch Web Interface To Display Group to VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click Monitor VCL Group to VLAN 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 14 2 The MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static Group Name to VLAN mapping Table Stauts Home Group to VLAN Auto refresh a Port Members Group Name VLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 No Group entries Parameter description Group Name A valid Group Name is a string at the most 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be pre used by any other existing mapping entry on this page e VLANID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Buttons Auto refresh _ Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click t
206. hose bridges are not under the full control of the administrator This feature is also Known as Root Guard Restricted TCN If enabled causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other ports If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning tree s active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of the attached LANs transits frequently BPDU Guard If enabled causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU s Contrary to the similar bridge setting the port Edge status does not affect this setting A port entering error disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 110 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Point to Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than to a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously
207. iated with the PSE type device s port that is sourcing the power There are three levels of power priority The three levels are Critical High and Low User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 254 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com If the power priority is unknown it is indicated as Unknown Maximum Power The Maximum Power Value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts required by a PD device from a PSE device or the minimum power a PSE device is capable of sourcing over a maximum length cable based on its current configuration The maximum allowed value is 102 3 W If the device indicates value higher than 102 3 W it is represented as reserved Buttons Auto refresh L Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 255 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 4 10 4EEE By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency This latency occurs due to that the circuits EEE turn off to save power need time to boot up before sending traffic over the link This time is called wakeup time To achieve minimal latency devices can use LLDP to exchange information about their respective tx and rx wakeup time as a way to agree upon the minimum wakeup time they need This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP Web Interface To show LLDP EEE neighbors
208. ic IP can avoid the change of IPs when devices need to be re started Note The Search function on the Device list page supports search entry by Model Name MAC address or IP addresses User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 301 VIVOTEK WWW VIY OTEK COM 7 5 Camera Upgrade This section describes how to upgrade Camera firmware Revisions of camera firmware can be available through time to enhance functionality If you have multiple cameras of the same model you can upgrade their firmware in one process Web interface To configure Surveillance Camera Upgrade in the web interface Click Surveillance gt Management gt Camera amp Encoder gt Camera Upgrade Click Select Device to enter the selected page Click Choose File to select firmware from the client computer Single or multiple clicks on their checkboxes to select cameras Click Apply to upload the firmware to the switch buffer Se w YS You can select Start Upgrade by Schedule time or select Right Now to immediately start the upgrade process Figure 7 5 1 Camera upgrade Sviveork Camera Batch SW Upgrade Status Switch Surveillance Auto refresh _ ol Management v Select Model Name Device Name MAC IP Address gt Information No intormation tound gt Time gt NVR amp CMS Select Device Camera amp Encoder v gt Device List gt Camera Upgrade Start U grade At Schedule Time yyy mm dd hh mm 2011 0l 0i 00
209. ice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling conditional for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling conditional for use
210. ick Apply Figure 3 5 1 8 4 The RMON Event Configuration RMON Event Configuration Home Event Delete ID Desc Type Community Event Last Time Add New Entry Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the RMON History Configuration page Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e ID Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 Desc Indicates this event the string length is from O to 127 default is a null string Type Indicates the notification of the event the possible types are none No SNMP log is created no SNMP trap is sent log Create SNMP log entry when the event is triggered snmptrap Send SNMP trap when the event is triggered logandtrap Create SNMP log entry and sent SNMP trap when the event is triggered e Community Specify the community when trap is sent the string length is from O to 127 default is public Event Last Time Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 64 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 5 2 Network 3 5 2 1 Limit Control This section shows you to to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses Web Interface To configure a Configuration of Limit Control in the web interface 1 Select Enabled in the
211. igned by the RADIUS server The field is blank if no QoS class is assigned Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that NAS has put the port in The field is blank if the Port VLAN ID is not overridden by NAS If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server RADIUS assigned is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about RADIUS assigned VLANs here If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN Guest is appended to the VLAN ID Read more about Guest VLANs here Port Counters EAPOL Counters These supplicant frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 213 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X G Backend Server Counters These backend RADIUS frame counters are available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth Last Supplicant Client Info Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate This information is available for the following administrative states e Port based 802 1X Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth Selected Counters Selected Counters The Selected Counters table is visible when the port is in one of the following administrative States e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth The table is identical to and is placed next to the Port Counters table and will be empty i
212. igure 3 14 1 The Port Isolation Configuration Private VLAN Membership Configuration Home Port Isolation Auto refresh A Port Isolation Configuration Port Number 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 OO JOJO JO JU JO JU JOJO JOJO JOJO JOJO JOJO JOU JO JO JOJO JO JOO Parameter description Port Members A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN When checked port isolation is enabled on that port When unchecked port isolation is disabled on that port By default port isolation is disabled on all ports Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 143 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 15 VCL 3 15 1 MAC based VLAN MAC address based VLAN decides the VLAN for forwarding an untagged frame based on the source MAC address of the frame A most common way of grouping VLAN members is by port hence the name port based VLAN Typically the device adds the same VLAN tag to untagged packets that are received through the same port Later on these packets can be forwarded in the same VLAN Port based VLAN is easy to configure and applies to networks where the locations of terminal devices are relatively fixed As mobile office and wireless network access gain more popularity the ports that terminal devices use to access the networks are very often non fixed A device may acc
213. iles present on the switch except for running config which represents the currently active configuration Select the file to activate and click This will initiate the process of completely replacing the existing configuration with that of the selected file Web Interface To activate configuration in the web interface 5 Chick Browser to select Maintenance Configuration in you device 6 Click Activate Select Figure 6 4 4 Configuration Activation Activate Activate Configuration Home Select configuration file to activate The previous configuration will be completely replaced potentially leading to loss of management connectivity Please note The activated configuration file will not be saved to startup config automatically File Name default config startup config Activate Configuration There are two system files 1 default config A read only file with vendor specific configuration This file is read when the system is restored to default settings 2 startup config The startup configuration for the switch read at boot time Parameter description Buttons Activate Configuration Click the Activate button then the default config or startup config file will be activated and to be this switch s running configuration User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 288 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 6 4 5 Delete It is possible to delete any of the writable files stored in flash including startup config If this is
214. in a network which significantly improves network resource utilization while maintaining a loop free environment Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Port Type Shows the Port Type Port type can be any of Unaware C port S port Custom S port User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 266 WWW VvVIVOoOTeEK com lf Port Type is Unaware all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed C port is Customer Port S port is Service port Custom S port is S port with Custom TPID Ingress Filtering Shows the ingress filtering on a port This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN the frame is discarded Frame Type Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on that port are discarded e Port VLAN ID Shows the Port VLAN ID PVID that a given user wants the port to have The field is empty if not overridden by the selected user Tx Tag Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged e UVID Shows UVID untagged VLAN ID Port s UVID determines the packet s behaviour at the egress side Conflicts Shows status of Conflicts whether exists or not When a Volatile VLAN User requests to set VLAN membership or VLAN port confi
215. in network topologies that require a separate User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 125 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com policy for the video signalling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy Tag Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 VLAN ID VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of O represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behaviour for the
216. information found User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 321 WWW VvIVvoTeK comMm 9 2 Grouping Note the following with the Grouping VLAN configuration 3 VLAN ID 1 is the default for all Ethernet ports on the PoE switch 4 Enter a number ranging from 2 4095 as the VLAN ID 5 The configuration aims to simplify the process of VLAN settings The program will automatically configure spanning tree loopback detection and other associated settings in the background Web interface To configure Surveillance Grouping in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance Management and Grouping 2 Click on the Add button Refer to the discussion below for configuration details 3 Click the Apply button Figure 9 2 1 Surveillance Grouping Grouping Configuration Grouping Name NVR CMS Number Camera Number Description VLAN ID Grouping Setting Home Grouping General Setting Name Description VLAN ID User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 322 NVR CMS Member Setting Camera Encorder Member Setting Parameter description Grouping Name WWWEVIiVvattS Kk oaom 192 168 0 40 192 168 0 6 IP8337H 192 168 0 20 192 168 0 5 IP8364 lt lt Remove 192 168 0 4 aabbcc 169 254 100 207 PD8136 169 254 7 253 IP8362 1 192 168 0 69 Mega Pixel N 192 168 0 80 Mega Pixel N Enter a name for a VLAN group 1 32 numeric or alphabetic characters Description Enter a short description for the VLAN group O 255 numeric
217. ing modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 70 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com e MAC Based Auth If a client is denied access either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or because the RADIUS server request times out according to the timeout specified on the Configuration Security AAA page the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state The hold timer does not count during an on going authentication In MAC based Auth mode the The switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during the hold time The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds e RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled RADIUS assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch The RADIUS server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature See RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description The RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable RADIUS server assigned QoS Class functionality When checked the individual ports ditto setting determine whether RADIUS assigned QoS Class is enabled on that port When unchecked RADIUS server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports e RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enable
218. ink EEE LP EEE Cap EEE Savings ActiPhy Savings PerfectReach Savings 1 x v 2 amp x x x x x 3 amp x x x x x 4 x x x x x 23 a x x x x x 24 x x x x x 25 x x x x x 26 x x x x x Parameter description Local Port This is the logical port number for this row Link Shows if the link is up for the port green link up red link down EEE Shows if EEE is enabled for the port reflects the settings at the Port Power Savings configuration page LP EEE cap User Shows if the link partner is EEE capable EEE Savings Shows if the system is currently saving power due to EEE When EEE Is enabled the system will powered down if no frame has been received or transmitted in 5 uSec Actiphy Savings Shows if the system is currently saving power due to ActiPhy PerfectReach Savings Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 190 WWW VvIVvoTeEK comMm Shows if the system is currently saving power due to PerfectReach 4 3 Ports The section describes to configure the Port detail parameters of the switch Others you could using the Port configure to enable or disable the Port of the switch Monitor the ports content or status in the function 4 3 1 Traffic Overview The section describes to the Port statistics information and provides overview of general traffic Statistics for all switch ports Web Interface To Display the Port Statistics Overview in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Port then Traffic Overview 2 If you
219. ion Port EEE Urgent Queues ActiPHY PerfectReach EE 1 2 a 5 6 7 e L L Oo JO JO JU JO JO JO Jo fo L L G E G JU JO JO JO Jo fo L L O JU JO JO O JO JO Jo O L L H JO JO H JO A B Jo B User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 26 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 2a L LI O O O jo O Jo JO Jo oO af L a O O O 0O 0O JO JO JO O ni L L EU EL JE E E E E e is L L u E G G U G ok a a Parameter description Optimize EEE for The switch can be set to optimize EEE for either best power saving or least traffic latency Port The switch port number of the logical port ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled ActiPHY works by lowering the power for a port when there is no link The port is power up for short moment in order to determine if cable is inserted PerfectReach Cable length power savings enabled PerfectReach works by determining the cable length and lowering the power for ports with short cables EEE Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port For maximizing power savings the circuit isn t started at once transmit data is ready for a port but is instead queued until a burst of data is ready to be transmitted This will give some traffic latency If desired it is possible to minimize the latency for specific frames by mapping the frames to a specific queue done with QOS and then mark the queue as an urgent queue When an urgent queue gets data to be transmitted the circuits will be powered up at o
220. is is the logical port number for this row User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 28 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port Configured Link Speed Selects any available link speed for the given switch port Only speeds supported by the specific port is shown Possible speeds are Disabled Disables the switch port operation Auto Port auto negotiating speed with the link partner and selects the highest speed that is compatible with the link partner 10Mbps HDX Forces the cu port in 10Mbps half duplex mode 10Mbps FDX Forces the cu port in 10Mbps full duplex mode 100Mbps HDX Forces the cu port in 100Mbps half duplex mode 100Mbps FDX Forces the cu port in 100Mbps full duplex mode 1Gbps FDX Forces the port in 1Gbps full duplex 2 5Gbps FDX Forces the Serdes port in 2 5Gbps full duplex mode SFP_Auto_AMS Automatically determines the speed of the SFP Note There is no standardized way to do SFP auto detect so here it is done by reading the SFP rom Due to the missing standardized way of doing SFP auto detect some SFPs might not be detectable The port is set in AMS mode Cu port is set in Auto mode 100 FX SFP port in 100 FX speed Cu port disabled 100 FX_AMS Port in AMS mode SFP port in 100 FX speed Cu port in Auto mode 1000 X SFP port
221. it can only treat them all as the broadcast packet Without IGMP Snooping the multicast packet forwarding function is plain and nothing is different from broadcast packet A switch supported IGMP Snooping with the functions of query report and leave a type of packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router Switch and IP Multicast Host can update the information of the Multicast table when a member port joins or leaves an IP Multicast Destination Address With this function once a switch receives an IP multicast packet it will forward the packet to the members who joined in a specified IP multicast group before The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits multicast packets to the multicast group that had not been built up in advance IGMP mode enables the switch to issue IGMP function that you enable IGMP proxy or snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP 3 9 1 1 Basic Configuration The section describes how to set the basic IGMP snooping on the switch which connects to a router closer to the root of the tree This interface is the upstream interface The router on the upstream interface should be running IGMP Web Interface To configure the IGMP Snooping parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration IPMC IGMP Snooping Basic Configuration 2 Evoke to select
222. ith value 2 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Request The number of request option 53 with value 3 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Decline The number of decline option 53 with value 4 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx ACK The number of ACK option 53 with value 5 packets received and transmitted User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 204 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm e Rx and Tx NAK The number of NAK option 53 with value 6 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Release The number of release option 53 with value 7 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Inform The number of inform option 53 with value 8 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Query The number of lease query option 53 with value 10 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned The number of lease unassigned option 53 with value 11 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Unknown The number of lease unknown option 53 with value 12 packets received and transmitted Rx and Tx Lease Active Rx and Tx Lease Active The number of lease active option 53 with value 13 packets received and transmitted Rx Discarded checksum error The number of discard packet that IP UDP checksum is error Rx Discarded from Untrusted The number of discarded packet that are coming from untrusted port User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 205 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 4 5
223. k gt IP Source Guard Auto refresh Startfrom Porti V VLAN 1 and IP address 0 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address No more entries Parameter description Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the IP traffic is permitted IP Address User IP address of the entry MAC Address Source MAC address Buttons Auto refresh EA Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 219 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Refresh Click to refresh the page lt lt Updates the system log entries to the first available entry ID gt gt Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 220 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 4 5 2 AAA 4 5 2 1 RADIUS Overview This section shows you an overview of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting servers status to ensure the function is workable Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Overview Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Security AAA then RADIUS Overview 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 5 2 1 The RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview RADIUS Server Status Overview Home RADIUS Overview RADIUS Authentication Server Status Overview IP Address Status 0 0 0 0 0 Disabled 0
224. l control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role Lower number means greater priority Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 100 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm 3 7 Loop Protection The loop Protection is used to detect the presence of traffic When switch receives packets looping detection frame MAC address the same as oneself from port show Loop Protection happens The port will be locked when it received the looping Protection frames If you want to resume the locked port please find out the looping path and take off the looping path then select the resume the locked port and click on Resume to turn on the locked ports Web Interface To configure the Loop Protection parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Loop Protection 2 Evoke to select enable or disable the port loop Protection 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 7 The Loop Protection Configuration Loop Protection Configuration Home Coni Loop Protection Global Configuration Enable Loop Protection Disable Y Transmission Time 5 seconds Shutdown Time 180 seconds Port Configuration Port 24 25 26 Enable Action Tx Mode lt gt v gt M Shutdo
225. l is of host type Expired Binding Number of bindings that their lease time expired or they are cleared from Automatic Manual type bindings DHCP Message Received Counters DISCOVER Number of DHCP DISCOVER messages received REQUEST Number of DHCP REQUEST messages received DECLINE Number of DHCP DECLINE messages received RELEASE Number of DHCP RELEASE messages received INFORM Number of DHCP INFORM messages received DHCP Message Sent Counters OFFER Number of DHCP OFFER messages sent ACK Number of DHCP ACK messages sent NAK Number of DHCP NAK messages sent 4 4 1 2 Binding This page displays bindings generated for DHCP clients Web Interface To Display DHCP Server Binding IP in the web interface Click DHCP Server and Binding Figure 4 4 1 2 The Group Name of VLAN Mapping Table DHCP Server Binding IP BeHome Binding Auto refresh C A Clear Selected Clear Manual Clear Expired Binding IP Address Delete IP Type State Pool Name Server ID Parameter description IP User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 201 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com IP address allocated to DHCP client Type Type of binding Possible types are Automatic Manual Expired State State of binding Possible states are Committed Allocated Expired e Pool Name The pool that generates the binding ServeriD Server IP address to service the binding 4 4 1 3 Declined IP This page displays declined
226. lay the configure SNMP System in the web interface 1 Click SNMP System 2 Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function 3 Specify the Engine ID 4 Click Apply Figure 3 5 1 6 1 The SNMP System Configuration SNMP System Configuration Home saig Mode Enabled M Version SNMP v2c M Read Community public Write Community private Engine ID 800007e5017f000001 Parameter description e Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Version User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 45 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 Read Community Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access t
227. le LLDP trap AAA Indicates that the AAA group s traps Possible traps are Authentication Fail Enable disable SNMP trap authentication failure trap Switch Indicates that the Switch group s traps Possible traps are STP Enable disable STP trap RMON Enable disable RMON trap G Private Indicates the rule for private traps to be sent none no private traps will be sent Critical only critical level traps will be sent Warning warning and critical level traps will be sent Info all levels of traps info warning and critical will be sent User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 49 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 5 1 6 3 Communities The function is used to configure SNMPv3 communities The Community and UserName is unique To create a new community account please check lt Add new community gt button and enter the account information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 4 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Communities in the web interface Click SNMP Communities Click Add new community Specify the SNMP communities parameters Click Apply If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset a lS Figure 3 4 1 6 3 The SNMPv1 v2 Communities Security Configuration SNMPv3 Community Configuration Home Communities Delete Community Source IP Source Mask C public 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 private 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add New Entry Parameter description Delete Check to delete the e
228. licate the functions of a VLAN would require a separate parallel collection of network cables and equipment separate from the primary network However unlike physically separate networks VLANs share bandwidth so VLAN trunks may require aggregated links and or quality of service prioritization VLAN separates surveillance video traffic on existing data network and reduces broadcast traffic on the network In addition to this only authorized users and those who are physically connected to the network can access devices within a VLAN Below is a sample drawing of 3 VLANs ses Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 D ME VLAN 101 VLAN 102 VLAN 103 VLAN 101 VLAN 101 VLAN 103 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 309 The applications running in a network environment can vary Segregating network traffic can ensure that the bandwidth for critical video recording is not compromised by the traffic demands for other applications Application View Router VLAN ID 101 VLAN ID 102 VLAN ID 200 Outdoor surveillance Indoor surveillance Intranet traffic e g parking lot F TP Email print In terms of surveillance applications the connections of an adequate number of IP cameras can be configured into a VLAN and span across different switches The server running the VAST central management software can join multiple VLANs so that VAST will then be able to manage the video resources on multiple cameras and NVRs Indoor Outdoor V
229. ll LLDP MED neighbours The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected This function applies to VoIP devices which support LLDP MED The columns hold the following information Web Interface To show LLDP MED neighbor 1 Click Monitor LLDP LLLDP MED Neighbor 2 Click Refresh for manual update web screen 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 4 10 2 The LLDP MED Neighbours information LLDP MED Neighbor Information Home LLDP MED Neighbors Auto refresh _ 2 Local Port No LLDP MED neighbor information found NOTE If your network without any device supports LLDP MED then the table will show No LLDP MED neighbour information found Parameter description Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Device Type LLDP MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device Definition LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices as defined in TIA 1057 provide access to the IEEE 802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP MED Endpoint Devices An LLDP MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies 1 LAN Switch Router 2 IEEE 802 1 Bridge 3 IEEE 802 3 Repeater included for historical reasons 4 IEEE 802 11 Wireless Access Point 5 Any device that supports the IEEE 802 1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA
230. lobally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4095 Max Reauth Count The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 255 e Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN it will first check if this option is enabled or disabled If disabled unchecked default the switch will only enter the Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life time of the port If enabled checked the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life time of the port The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 71 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Port Configuration The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns which are Port The port number for which the configuration below applies Admin State If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Suc
231. lt a Diagnostics lt HM Mega Pinel Network Camer Maintenance 100 M 30M fo M TOM EDU AP Ld Figure 7 1 1 Surveillance Information See below for the parameters of all surveillance related information Surveillance Information Surveillance Software Version 0116 Total Device 23 Mac Address 00 02 D1 32 65 2 IPv4 DHCP State BOUND server 192 168 0 21 Current IPv4 Address 192 168 6 149 24 Surveillance Working Status Ready System Date 2011 01 02T02 4 3 10 00 00 System Uptime 1d02 43 10 Surveillance State Enabled Device Scan Range Manual v Device Scan Starting IP Address 192 168 4 254 Device Scan Ending IP Address 192 168 6 1 Qos Setting Qos Enable Disabled Qos Class 7 Y IP Setting IPv4 DHCP Enable IPv4 Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DNS Server Configured v 1689511 DNS Proxy w DHCP Server Setting DHCP Server Disabled Y IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 1 Size of Pool 254 Apply Parameter description User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 292 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Surveillance Software Version Displays the current surveillance firmware version number Total Device Displays the number of devices in your topology MAC Address The MAC Address of this switch I Pv4 DHCP State The current DHCP status showing whether the DHCP client status is enabled Current I Pv4 Address The current address IPv4 Surveillance uses switch interface VLANI1 as default
232. ly aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Single 802 1X variant Single 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X In Single 802 1X at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time Normal EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch If more than one supplicant is connected to a port the one that comes first when the port s link comes up will be the first one considered If that supplicant doesn t provide valid credentials within a certain amount of time another supplicant will get a chance Once a supplicant is successfully authenticated only that supplicant will be allowed access This is the most secure of all the supported modes In this mode the Port Security module is used to secure a supplicant s MAC address once successfully authenticated Multi 802 1X In port based 802 1X authentication once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on a port the whole port is opened for network traffic This allows other clients connected to the port for instance through a hub to piggy back on the successfully authenticated client and get network access even though they really aren t authenticated To overcome this security breach use the Multi 802 1X variant Multi 802 1X is really not an IEEE standard but features many of the same characteristics as does port based 802 1X Multi 802 1X is lik
233. m Managed aa Graphic Monitoring lt Location VIVOTEK amp Maintenance lt Contact System Name AW GEV 264A 185 System Date 2011 01 01700 11 01 00 00 System Uptime 00 11 01 Bootloader Version vi 15a Firmware Version v6 04 2014 12 05 Hardware Version v1 01 Mechanical Version v1 01 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 16 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK com Parameter description System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is O to 128 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 System name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name Is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of aname The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is O to 128 System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 128 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 17 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 1 2 IP The IPv4 address for the switch could be obtained via DHCP Server for VLAN 1 To manually configure an address you need to change the switch
234. members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table the Group Name VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the information automatically User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 148 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information by manual 3 15 3 IP Subnet based VLAN The IP subnet based VLAN entries can be configured here This page allows for adding updating and deleting IP subnet based VLAN entries and assigning the entries to different ports This page shows only static entries Web Interface To Display IP subnet based VLAN Membership to configured in the web interface 1 Click VCL Group Name VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the VCE ID IP Address Mask Length VLAN ID and select Port Members 3 Click Apply Figure 2 15 3 IP Subnet based VLAN Membership Configuration IP Subnet based VLAN Membership Configuration Home IP Subnet based VLAN Auto refresh _ Ea Port Members Delete VCE IP Mask VLAN
235. mplete the IGMP Snooping configuration then you could to let the switch display the IGMP Snooping Status The Section provides you to let switch to display the IGMP Snooping detail status Web Interface To display the IGMP Snooping status in the web interface 1 2 3 4 Click Monitor IGMP Snooping Status If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh Click Refresh to refresh the IGMP Snooping Status Click Clear to clear the IGMP Snooping Status Figure 4 9 1 1 The I GMP Snooping Status IGMP Snooping Status Home Status Auto refresh _ a z Statistics VLAN Querier Host Querier Queries Queries V1 Reports V2 Reports V3 Reports V2 Leaves ID Version Version Status Transmitted Received Received Received Received Received Router Port Port 1 2 3 4 23 24 25 26 Status Parameter description e VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry Querier Version Working Querier Version currently Host Version Working Host Version currently Querier Status User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 245 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Shows the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE DISABLE denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled Queries Transmitted The number of Transmitted Queries Queries Received The number of Received Queries V1 Reports Received The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Received The
236. mpty which means that the port will not be member of any of the existing VLANs but if it is configured for VLAN Trunking it will still be able to carry all unknown VLANs Forbidden VLANs A port may be configured to never be member of one or more VLANs This is particularly useful when User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 139 dynamic VLAN protocols like MVRP and GVRP must be prevented from dynamically adding ports to VLANs The trick is to mark such VLANs as forbidden on the port in question The syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Existing VLANs field By default the field is left blank which means that the port may become a member of all possible VLANs User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 140 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 14 Private VLANs In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN 3 14 1 VLAN Membership The VLAN membership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 4096 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN Web Interface To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface 1 Click VLAN membership Configuration 2 Specify Management VLAN ID O 4094 3 Click Apply Figure 3 14 1 The VLAN Membership Configuration Private VLAN Membership Configuration M Home Membership Auto refr
237. n Example Copenhagen City district City division borough city district ward chou Japan Block Neighbourhood Neighbourhood block Street Street Example Poppelvej Leading street direction Leading street direction Example N Trailing street suffix Trailing street suffix Example SW Street suffix Street suffix Example Ave Platz House no House number Example 21 House no suffix User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 123 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com House number suffix Example A 1 2 e Landmark Landmark or vanity address Example Columbia University Additional location info Additional location info Example South Wing e Name Name residence and office occupant Example Flemming Jahn Zip code Postal zip code Example 2791 Building Building structure Example Low Library e Apartment Unit Apartment suite Example Apt 42 Floor Floor Example 4 Room no Room number Example 450F Place type Place type Example Office Postal community name Postal community name Example Leonia P O Box Post office box P O BOX Example 12345 Additional code Additional code Example 1320300003 Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service e g E911 and others such as defined by TIA or NENA Emergency Call Service Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELI
238. n allows you to map a already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the selected stack switch unit switch Web Interface To Display Group Name to VLAN mapping table configured in the web interface 1 Click Group Name VLAN configuration and add new entry 2 Specify the Group Name and VLAN ID 3 Click Apply Figure 3 15 2 2 The Group Name of VLAN Mapping Table Group Name to VLAN mapping Table Home Group to VLAN Auto refresh _ Ee Port Members Delete Group Name VLAN ID 1 2 34567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 No Group entries Add New Entry Parameter description Delete To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry check this box The entry will be deleted on the switch during the next Save Group Name A valid Group Name is a string of atmost 16 characters which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 no special character is allowed whichever Group name you try map to a VLAN must be present in Protocol to Group mapping table and must not be preused by any other existing mapping entry on this page e VLAN ID Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1 4095 e Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping To include a port in a mapping check the box To remove or exclude the port from the mapping make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are
239. n port 1 Login passed for user admin Link down on port 1 Link up on port 1 To evoke the auto refresh icon then the device will refresh the log automatically Level level of the system log entry The following level types are supported Information level of the system log Warning Warning level of the system log Error Error level of the system log All All levels e ID ID gt 1 of the system log entry e Time It will display the log record by device time The time of the system log entry Message It will display the log detail message The message of the system log entry Buttons User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 187 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm auto refresh OERA EARS ES EA ES Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Updates the system log entries starting from the current entry ID Clear Flushes the selected log entries lt lt Updates the system log entries starting from the first available entry ID lt lt Updates the system log entries ending at the last entry currently displayed gt gt Updates the system log entries starting from the last entry currently displayed gt gt Updates the system log entries ending at the last available entry ID User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 188 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 4 1 4 Detailed Log This section describes that display the detailed log information o
240. n this Ethernet segment e Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent Buttons Auto refresh eB Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the History table i e the entry with the lowest History Index and Sample Index gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 231 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 4 5 3 1 3 Alarm This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Alarm table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table The Start from Control Index allows the user to select the starting point in the Alarm table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest Alarm table match The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to st
241. nagement w Total Device 73 gt Information Mac Addrass 00 02 D1 32 C5 25 gt Times t gt NVR CMS IPv4 DHCP State BOUND server 192 168 0 21 Camera amp Encoder lt Currant IPv4 Address 192 168 6 149 24 gt Switch Surveillance Working Status Ready gt Un mansged Devices lt System Date 2011 01 027T6 35 12400 00 es Graphic View v System Uptime 1d 02 35 12 gt Topology View To Surveillance State Enabled gt Google Map Device R Manu 8 Surveillance Network dr ae eenions gt Security Device Scan Starting IP Address 199 168 4 286 gt Groupe Device Scan Ending IP Address 192 160 6 1 L Monitor v gt Traffic Chart Qos Setting gt Irestant Throughput Qos Enable Disabled F am Clagnostics w gt Device Status Qos Class 7 Pa Maintenance v IP Setti gt Device Intoto CSV e gt Surveillance Config IPv4 DHCP Enable IPv4 Address 192 169 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 3 You should save the configuration changes made on the Surveillance menus before leaving the web page Otherwise the configuration changes will be lost The save button is located on the upper right corner of the screen Ae Trouble Shooting Home laintenance gt Trouble Shooting Whenever changes are made the Save button will turn blue Click to save your configuration on this page P Another 2 buttons allow you to logout the current session and access the technical support information User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 290
242. nce and the latency will be reduced to the wakeup time EEE Urgent Queues Queues set will activate transmission of frames as soon as data is available Otherwise the queue will postpone transmission until a burst of frames can be transmitted User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 21 WWW viv OTEK COM 3 3 Ports Configuration The section describes to configure the Port detail parameters of the switch Others you could using the Port configure to enable or disable the Port of the switch Monitor the ports content or status in the function 3 3 1 Ports This page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here Web Interface To configure a Current Port Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Ports Configuration and Ports 2 Specify the Speed Configured Flow Control Maximum Frame size Excessive Collision mode and Power Control 3 Click Apply Figure 3 3 1 The Port Configuration Ports Configuration Home Ports Speed Flow Control ma aximum xcessive Port Link Current Configured Current Rx CurrentTx Configured Frame Size Collision Mode lt gt M E 9600 lt gt w 1 2 1Gfdx Auto M Y E 9600 Discard M 2 Down Auto v g 9600 Discard M 3 Down Auto v Q y E 9600 Discard w 24 Down Auto M 7 4 E 9600 Discard ha 25 ee Down SFP_Auto AMS W E 9600 Discard w 26 amp Down SFP_Auto_AMS y 74 4 O 9600 Discard M Parameter description Port Th
243. nd continue with the configuration floor 1 floor 1 howling 6 Click the Save button to save your configuration User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 316 Figure 8 2 1 Floor View Floor View Switch pcam amp Encoder yr NYR PC CMS VIVOTEK WWW viv OT EK C OM Home 9 IAN a lt 9 9 9 9 AW GEV 2644 185 AwW GEV 2644 185 192 168 1 1 IP8152 1639 254 1 18 N08321 169 254 244 212 5F8174 132 168 1 6 IB8367 IB8B367 192 168 1 9 IBS338 H Device List When the configuration is done use the Export Floor View function on the upper right of the screen to export your configuration The file format can be SVG PNG or PDF Chrome and Firefox e Home Graphicview FlaorPlan Floorview SVG E Export Floorview to Device List AY GEY 2 6 44 1685 bb ets Sa oe Note that if using IE browser you can only export files in the SVG format User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 317 VIVOTEK WWW VIY OTEK COM 8 3 Floor Image In this page you can upload or manage floor map images Due to the limitation of the flash memory up to 20 JPEG images each of a max of 256KB size can be uploaded to the switch Web interface To configure the Floor Image in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Floor Plan gt Floor Image 2 Click Browse to select Floor image from the client computer Enter a name for the Name en
244. nds IPv4 DHCP Current Lease For DHCP interfaces with an active lease this column show the current interface address as provided by the DHCP server I Pv4 Address The IPv4 address of the interface in dotted decimal notation If DHCP is enabled this field is not used The field may also be left blank if IPv4 operation on the interface is not desired I Pv4 Mask The IPv4 network mask in number of bits prefix length Valid values are between 0 and 30 bits for a IPv4 address If DHCP is enabled this field is not used The field may also be left blank if IPv4 operation on the interface is not desired IPv6 Address User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 19 WWM Vek om The IPv6 address of the interface A IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 coff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can appear only once It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on the interface is not desired I Pv6 Mask The IPv6 network mask in number of bits prefix length Valid values are between 1 and 128 bits for a IPv6 address The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on the interface is not desired I P Routes Delete
245. nfigured with the QCE Action Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured are matched with the frame s content There are three action fields Class DPL and DSCP Class Classified QoS Class if a frame matches the QCE it will be put in the queue User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 195 WWW VvIvoTrTeEK comMm DPL Drop Precedence Level if a frame matches the QCE then DP level will set to value displayed under DPL column DSCP If a frame matches the QCE then DSCP will be classified with the value displayed under DSCP column Conflict Displays Conflict status of QCL entries It may happen that resources required to add a QCE may not available in that case it shows conflict status as Yes otherwise it is always No Please note that conflict can be resolved by releaseing the H W resources required to add QCL entry on pressing Resolve Conflict button Buttons nto teh ER EEES Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Combined wv Resolve Conflict Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry incase conflict status for any QCL entry is yes Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 196 4 3 4 Detailed Statistics WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm The section describes how to provide detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select
246. ng config may take a little while to complete as the file must be prepared for upload Web Interface To upload configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select Maintenance Configuration in you device 2 Click upload Select Figure 6 4 2 Configuration upload Upload Configuration File to Upload Browse Destination File File Name Parameters running config v Replace Merge startup config Create new file Upload Configuration There are three system files 1 running config A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on the switch This file is volatile 2 startup config The startup configuration for the switch read at boot time 3 default config A read only file with vendor specific configuration This file is read when the system is restored to default settings Parameter description Buttons Upload Configuration Click the Upload button then the running web management PC will start to upload the configuration from the managed switch configuration into the location PC user can configure web browser s upload file path to keep configuration file User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 286 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 6 4 3 Download This section describes to export the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs Any current configuration files will be exported as text format It is possible to download a file from the web browser to all the files on the switch except def
247. ntry It will be deleted during the next save e Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The community string will be treated as security name and map a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address A particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 50 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 5 1 6 4 Users The function is used to configure SNMPv3 user The Entry index key is UserName To create a new UserName account please check lt Add new user gt button and enter the user information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 10 Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Users in the web interface 1 Click SNMP Users 2 Specify the Privilege parameter 3 Click Apply Figure 3 5 1 6 4 The SNMP Users Configuration SNMPv3 User Configuration Home Users User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Delete Engine ID Name Level Protocol Password Protocol Password a 800007e5017f000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None Add New Entry SNMPv3 User Configuration Home Users User Security Authentication Authentication Privacy Privacy Delete Engine ID Name Level Prot
248. o SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c If SNMP version is SNMPv3 the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table It provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community string In addition to community string a particular range of source addresses can be used to restrict source subnet Engine ID Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 46 WWW VvIVvoTeK comMm 3 5 1 6 2 Trap Configure SNMP trap on this page Global Settings Configure SNMP trap on this page Web Interface To display the configure SNMP Trap Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Switch SNMP Trap 2 Click Add New Entry then you can create new SNMP Trap on the switch 3 Click Apply Figure 3 5 1 6 2 The SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Configuration Global Settings Mode Trap Destination Configurations Delete Name Enable Add New Entry SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Config Name Trap Mode Trap Version Trap Community Trap Destination Address Trap Destination Port Trap Inform Mode Trap Inf
249. o any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the NAS Configuration by manual 3 5 2 3 ACL The switch access control list ACL is probably the most commonly used object in the IOS It is used for packet filtering but also for selecting types of traffic to be analyzed forwarded or influenced in some way The ACLs are divided into Ether Types IPv4 ARP protocol MAC and VLAN parameters etc Here we will just go over the standard and extended access lists for TCP IP As you create ACEs for ingress classification you can assign a policy for each port the policy number is 1 8 however each policy can be applied to any port This makes it very easy to determine what type of ACL policy you will be working with 3 5 2 3 1 Ports The section describes how to configure the ACL parameters ACE of the each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE Web Interface To configure the ACL Ports Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Configuration ACL then Ports 2 To scroll the specific parameter value to select the correct value for port ACL setting 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values 5 After you configure complete then you could see the Counter of the port Then you
250. o configure DHCP server mode in the web interface 1 Click Configuration DHCP Server Mode 2 Select Enabled in the Global Mode of DHCP Server Mode Configuration 3 Add Vlan range 4 Click Apply Figure 3 4 1 1 The DHCP server Mode DHCP Server Mode Configuration tiome gt Configuration gt DHCP gt Server gt Mode Global Mode Mode Disabled M VLAN Mode Delete VLAN Range Mode Add VLAN Range DHCP Server Mode Configuration Hiome gt Configuration gt DHCP gt Server gt Mode Global Mode Mode Disabled V VLAN Mode Delete VLAN Range Mode Add VLAN Range Parameter description Mode User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 32 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK comMm Configure the operation mode per system Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP server per system Disabled Disable DHCP server pre system VLAN Range Indicate the VLAN range in which DHCP server is enabled or disabled The first VLAN ID must be smaller than or equal to the second VLAN ID BUT if the VLAN range contains only 1 VLAN ID then you can just input it into either one of the first and second VLAN ID or both On the other hand if you want to disable existed VLAN range then you can follow the steps 1 press ADD VLAN Range to add a new VLAN range 2 input the VLAN range that you want to disable 3 choose Mode to be Disabled 4 press Apply to apply the change Then you will see the disabled VLAN range is removed
251. o powered devices i e IP cameras Other color codes indicate the connection to other devices Figure 7 4 3 Device Status and Functional Buttons 3 1 3 1 Auto refresh e Fo ON LINE OFF LINE MANAGED UN MANAGED Restore Default Translate dynamic IP to static IP Refresh EZ Refresh and poll the connection statuses from the connected devices You may also select the Auto refresh checkbox The switch will update the connection status by every one second Edit device name E Click the button The device Name of IP cameras will become editable You can then enter a new name in the text box Batch Account Setting B Click the button to open a Batch Account window In there you can enter a common User name and Password and apply them to multiple cameras for ease of management Remove Select the checkbox in front of a device and then click the Remove button to remove a device from the list Reboot Select the checkbox in front of a device and then click the Reboot button to re start a device Rebooting a device can sometimes restore an IP camera from a faulty state Restore Default Select the checkbox in front of a device and then click the Restore default button to restore its firmware default Translate dynamic IP to static IP By default VIVOTEK s IP cameras listen to a DHCP server for a dynamic IP This button sets their dynamic IPs that are currently in use into static IPs Using a stat
252. o refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 271 WWW VvIvoTrTeEK comMm 4 14 3 IP Subnet based VLAN The page shows IP subnet based VLAN entries This page shows only static entries Web Interface To Display MAC based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click Monitor VCL IP Subnet based VLAN 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 18 3 The MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static IP Subnet based VLAN Membership Stauts Home IP Subnet based VLAN Auto refresh _ B Port Members VCE ID IP Address Mask Length VLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Currently no entries present Parameter description e VCEID Indicates the index of the entry It is user configurable It s value ranges from 0 128 If a VCE ID is 0 application will auto generate the VCE ID for that entry Deletion and lookup of IP subnet based VLAN are based on VCE ID IP Address Indicates the IP address Mask Length Indicates the network mask length e VLAN ID Indicates the VLAN ID VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet based VLAN entry To include a port in a IP subnet based VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from the IP subnet based VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all bo
253. oPriv Authentication and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy Read View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially set new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 57 3 5 1 6 8 Trap Event Severity WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm This page displays current trap event severity configurations Trap event severity can also be configured here Web Interface To display the configure Trap Event Serverity in the web interface PUNS Click SNMP Trap Event Severity Scroll to select the Group name and Severity Level Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 5 1 6 8 The Trap Event Severity Configuration Trap Event Severity Configuration Group Name ACL ACL Log Access Mgmt Auth Failed Cold Start Poe Auto Check Port Security VLAN Warm Start Parameter description Group Name The name identifying the severity group Severity Level Severity Level
254. oS Enabled RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Guest VLAN Enabled E Guest VLAN ID Max Reauth Count N Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen C Port Configuration Port Admin State RADIUS Assigned RADIUS Assigned Guest Port State Restart QoS Enabled VLAN Enabled VLAN Enabled M O LJ LI Reinitialize 1 Force Authorized C C Globally Disabled 2 Force Authorized Globally Disabled User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 69 24 Force Authorized M LJ 26 Force Authorized M C C Globally Disabled Reauthenticate Parameter description Mode Indicates if NAS is globally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames 6 Reauthentication Enabled lf checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Aging Period below Reauthentication Period Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated Thi
255. oadcast traffic across the switch Web Interface To configure the Storm Control Configuration parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Storm Control Configuration 2 Evoke to select the frame type to enable storm control 3 Scroll to set the Rate Parameters 4 Click the save to save the setting 5 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 12 The Storm Control Configuration Storm Control Configuration Home Storm Control Frame Type Enable Rate pps Unicast 1 v Multicast 1 Broadcast 1 v Parameter description Frame Type The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here Unicast Multicast or Broadcast Enable Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type Rate The rate unit is packets per second pps Valid values are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K 1024K 2048K 4096K 8192K 16384K or 32768K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 178 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 17 Mirror You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real time analysis You can then attach a lo
256. ocal link partners reflection echo of the remote link partners respective values When a local link partner receives its echoed values from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner has received registered and processed its most recent values For example if the local link partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB then the User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 256 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com local link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on stale information Echo Rx Tw The link partner s Echo Rx Tw value Resolved Tx Tw The resolved Tx Tw for this link Note NOT the link partner The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP Resolved Rx Tw The resolved Rx Tw for this link Note NOT the link partner The resolved value that is the actual tx wakeup time used for this link based on EEE information exchanged via LLDP EEE in Sync Shows whether the switch and the link partner have agreed on wake times Red Switch and link partner have not agreed on wakeup times Green Switch and link partner have agreed on wakeup times Buttons Auto refresh Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 257 4 10 5 Por
257. ocation of your current position is also supported Click to select a device The device will appear on the map 4 Click and drag the device to a preferred location Repeat the above process to complete the map setup and click Apply to finish the configuration Figure 8 4 1 Map View Map View Ho A P switch P tpcam amp Encode we Pec cus 5 Device l ist f lt gt f Pa Ww Aj i s O s AW CEV 264A 105 AW GEV 284A 185 i 192 148 1 1 g j 1P8152 tp a 168 1 169 254 244 212 y F0174 Mega Pixel Network ZANE RHEN Camers gt 192 168 1 7 a 9 4 FD8182 EAR 5 Mega Pixel Network Eanes gt Camera oe 169 254 23 255 f 188367 Zoom In X E t Zoom Out f 188367 x EEN 192 168 1 8 im 2 ic re a IBB338 H z Loe gt 1 SA e aS Ae o Hold down the button and move to a preferred direction To return to a location you previously visited simply click on a camera or device on the Device List you implanted on the map The current map view will move back to the location you previously 4 configured An implanted camera will be indicated by a bubble icon with a dim out color User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 319 VIVOTEK WWW YIYO TEK COM To remove a camera from a Google map click on the gen Scu camera s cross mark from the Device List and the a camera will disappear from map socal amp Encoder Oo IPBIS OW Mega Pivel d Network Camera 192 168 6 114 00 02 d1 25 5e B5 fad
258. ocol Password Protocol Password C 800007e5017f000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None Auth Priv M mp5 pes Add New Entry Parameter description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number in hexadecimal format with number of digits between 10 and 64 but all zeros and all F s are not allowed The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User based Security Model USM for message security and the View based Access Control Model VACM for access control For the USM entry the usmUserEnginelD and usmUserName are the entry s keys In a simple agent usmUserEnginelD is always that agent s own snmpEnginelD value The value can also take the value of the snmpEnginelD of a remote SNMP engine with which this user can communicate In other words if user engine ID equal system engine ID then it is local user otherwise it s remote user User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 51 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 126 Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv No authentication and no privacy Auth NoPriv Authenticati
259. of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value Org Discarded The number of organizationally received TLVs Age Outs Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented Buttons Auto refresh B z Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Clear Clears the counters for the selected port Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 259 WWW VIVOTeEK c amp 4 11 PoE This page allows the user to inspect the current status for all PoE ports Web Interface To Display ECE Statistics in the web interface 1 Click Monitor PoE 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 11 2 The PoE Statistics Power Over Ethernet Status Home Auto refresh aA Local Port PD class Power Requested Power Allocated Power Used Current Used Priority Port Status Total 0 w o Ww 0 w 0 mA Parameter description e Local Port This is the logical port number for this row PD Class om Each PD is classified according to a class that defines the maximum power the PD will use The PD Class shows the PDs class Five Classes are defined Class 0 Max power 15 4 W Class 1 Max powe
260. ogy MSTI Bridge ID ID Port Cost Flag Change Last CIST 32768 00 40 C7 01 02 03 32768 00 40 C7 01 02 03 0 Steady Parameter description e MSTI The Bridge Instance This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status e BridgelD The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance RootiIiD The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge it is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge e Topology Flag The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance e Topology Change Last The time since last Topology Change occurred Buttons Auto refresh a Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 242 4 8 2 Port Status After you complete the STP configuration the you could to ask the switch display the STP Port Status The Section provides you to ask switch to display the STP CIST port status for physical Port 1 2 22 23 24 25 26 ports of the currently selected switch Web Interface To display the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Spanning Tree STP Port Status WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to
261. ol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 6 IPv6 Protocol IP protocol number 0 255 TCP or UDP or Any Source IP IPv6 source address a b c d or Any 32 LS bits DSCP Diffserv Code Point value DSCP It can be specific value range of value or Any DSCP values are in the range 0 63 including BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Sport Source TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP Dport Destination TCP UDP port 0 65535 or Any specific or port range applicable for IP protocol UDP TCP 176 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm Action Configuration Class QoS Class class 0 7 default basic classification DP Valid DP Level can be 0 3 default basic classification DSCP Valid dscp value can be 0 63 BE CS1 CS7 EF or AF11 AF43 Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 177 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 16 12 Storm Control The section allows user to configure the Storm control for the switch There is a unicast storm rate control multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or br
262. om unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise Web Interface To configure a Port Security Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Security Network Port Security then Port 2 Specify the Port which you want to monitor 3 Checked Auto refresh 4 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 5 1 1 2 The Port Security Port Status Port Security Port Status Port 1 Home Port Auto refresh _ Ea Port1 M User Module Legend MAC Address VLAN ID State Time of Addition Age Hold No MAC addresses attached Parameter description MAC Address amp VLAN ID The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port If no MAC addresses are learned a single row stating No MAC addresses attached is displayed State Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding In the blocked state it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic Time of Addition Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port Age Hold If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC addres
263. ome Snooping Snooping Mode Disabled Port Mode Configuration Port Mode i 1 Trusted v 2 Trusted Y 23 Trusted M 24 Trusted M 25 Trusted M 26 Trusted M Parameter description Snooping Mode Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply packets from trusted ports Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Port Mode Configuration Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 37 WWWEVIiVvatTS Kk oaom Trusted Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 38 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 5 Security This section shows you to to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch You can use the Port Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses 3 5 1 Switch 3 5 1 1 Users This page provides an overview of the current users Currently the only way to login as another user on the web server is to close and reopen the browser Web Interface To configure Use
264. on Home Bridge Settings Basic Settings Protocol Version MSTP Vv Bridge Priority 32768 V Forward Delay 15 Max Age 20 Maximum Hop Count 20 Transmit Hold Count 6 Advanced Settings Edge Port BPDU Filtering W Edge Port BPDU Guard Port Error Recovery iN Port Error Recovery Timeout Parameter description Basic Settings Protocol Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP RSTP and MSTP Bridge Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds and MaxAge must be lt FwdDelay 1 2 Maximum Hop Count This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information to Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 104 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK
265. on and no privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means it must first be ensured that the value is set correctly Authentication Protocol Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocols are None No authentication protocol MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication password phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocols are None No privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol e Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy password phrase The allowed string length Is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 52 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 5 1 6 5 Group The function is used to
266. on status multicast traffic VLAN and priority status even illegal access record and so on The default values of the AW GEV 264A are listed in the table below IP Address DHCP client 255 255 255 0 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 13 VIVOTEK WWW VIY OTEK COM Password You can find the PoE switch using VIVOTEK s IW2 utility If network address conflicts occur use this utility to locate the PoE switch Device Selection I Wi i Select a devica to setup or upgrada Installation izard 2 If you double click on the entry found on the o_o Seach IW2 utility an IE console will be opened If Setup i Add Madal i 1 1 a eee you prefer using Firefox or Google Chrome Friis MAZIL EL E Carica 2 O0 02 0a S02t CA 1632 4520 POGLGSH ic i g 3 Oe ee 182 1611 PERS Dihs you can manually enter the IP address in r 4 O0 02 01 11 74 44 169 254 122 749 IPRS D200 2 3 00DE 14 20S 20F FEG 01006 yo ur b rowser sS U R L fi e d 6 00 00 81 52 01 12 164 25 1 1 18 PRISA 010i E AF A A 05 Toe 166 213 WAST iis B DR E 192 169 6 114 IP 01005 Please check the MAC and model name in the Network Camera Yvonne product label of your dewine first n Then you can start to link to your device and show the main screen by double clicking the ftom in the above selection list j W you are not able to find your device In the REE pe ae abowe selection lis please makit sore all cables are property connected to you
267. onfiguration gt Spanning Tree CIST Port to disable STP in each port The STP can also disable network loops and STP has a higher priority than the Loop Protection feature User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 102 3 8 Spanning Tree The Spanning Tree Protocol STP can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices that is an STP compliant switch bridge or router in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down STP STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device STP compliant switch bridge or router that serves as the root of the spanning tree network It selects a root port on each bridging device except for the root device which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports After determining the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root ports and designated ports eliminating an
268. onfiguration for the switch read at boot time m default config A read only file with vendor specific configuration This file is read when the system is restored to default settings It is also possible to store up to two other files and apply them to running config thereby switching configuration 6 4 1 Save startup config This copy running config to startup config thereby ensuring that the currently active configuration will be used at the next reboot Web Interface To save running configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Browser to select Maintenance Configuration in you device 2 Click Apply Startup Config Select Figure 6 4 1 The Save Startup Configuration Home Save startup config Save Running Configuration to startup config Please note The generation of the configuration file may be time consuming depending on the amount of non default configuration Save Configuration Parameter description Buttons Save Configuration Click to save configuration the running configuration will be written to flash memory for system boot up to load this startup configuration file User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 285 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 6 4 2 Upload The configuration upload function will be backed up and saved configuration from the switch s configuration into the running web browser PC It is possible to upload any of the files on the switch to the web browser Select the file and click Upload of runni
269. oop No ports enabled Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical port e Action The currently configured port action Transmit The currently configured port transmit mode Loops The number of loops detected on this port Status The current loop protection status of the port e Loop Whether a loop is currently detected on the port Time of Last Loop The time of the last loop event detected Buttons Auto refresh B Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately Auto refresh Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 241 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 4 8 Spanning Tree 4 8 1 Bridge Status After you complete the MSTI Port configuration you could ask the switch display the Bridge Status The Section provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance where the column displays the following information Web Interface To display the STP Bridges status in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Spanning Tree STP Bridges 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges 4 Click CIST to next page STP Detailed Bridge Status Figure 4 8 1 The STP Bridges status STP Bridges Home Bridge Status Auto refresh _ e Root Topology Topol
270. orm Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times Trap Probe Security Engine ID Trap Security Engine ID Trap Security Name User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 Home Destination Address Home Disabled y SNMP v2c Y Public 162 Disabled M 3 5 Enabled iy None iv Trap Destination Port 47 WUW viv oTEK COM SNMP Trap Event System _ Warm Start _ Cold Start Interface C Link up none specific all switches Link down none specific all switches LLDP none specific all switches AAA _ Authentication Fail Switch _ sTP _ RMON Trap Mode Indicates the trap mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation Trap Destination Configurations Configure trap destinations on this page Name Indicates the trap Configuration s name Indicates the trap destination s name Enable Indicates the trap destination mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are SNMPv1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 SNMPv2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 e Trap Community Indicates the community access string when sending SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is ASCII chara
271. orts have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received from neighbor devices If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are terminated by the switch Note When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP information isn t removed immediately but gets when the hold time is exceeded Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted e Mgmt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 120 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 10 2 LLDP MED Configuration Media Endpoint Discovery is an enhancement of LLDP known as LLDP MED that provides the following facilities Auto discovery of LAN policies Such as VLAN Layer 2 Priority and Differentiated services Diffserv settings enabling plug and play networking Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and in the case of
272. orts up to 20x Floor maps Added GPS data for the Google map location Save disk will preserve both surveillance and switch configurations 11 Added the display of Instant Throughput 12 Supports switch event notification via Emails 8 NOTE For users who use this switch in a surveillance application you can go directly to Chapter 7 through Chapter 12 for information directly related to surveillance deployments User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 9 WWW VvIVvoTeEK comMm INTRODUCTION Overview This user Ss manual provides installation and configuration details through a web console via the RJ 45 Ethernet connection The AW GEV 264A series the next generation L2 SNMP managed PoE switch is a portfolio of affordable managed switches that provides a reliable infrastructure for your business network These switches deliver more intelligent features and improve the availability of your critical business applications protect your sensitive information and optimize your network bandwidth to deliver information and applications more effectively It provides the ideal combination of affordability and capabilities for entry level networking including small business or enterprise applications and helps you create a more efficient workforce The AW GEV 264 L2 SNMP managed switch provides 26 ports in a single device the specifications are highlighted as follows L2 features provide better manageability security Qo
273. otocol The protocol ICMP UDP TCP packets to send IP Address The destination IP Address e Wait Time Set the time in seconds to wait for a response to a probe default 5 0 sec Values range from 1 to 60 The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes Max TTL Specifies the maximum number of hops max time to live value traceroute will probe Values range from 1 to 255 The default is 30 Probe Count Sets the number of probe packets per hop Values range from 1 to 10 The default is 3 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 279 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm Chapter 6 Switch Maintenance This chapter describes the entire switch Maintenance configuration tasks to enhance the performance of local network including Restart Device Firmware upgrade Save Restore Import Export 6 1 Restart Device This section describes how to restart switch for any maintenance needs Any configuration files or scripts that you saved in the switch should still be available afterwards Web Interface To configure a Restart Device Configuration in the web interface 1 Chick Restart Device 2 Click Yes Figure 6 1 Restart Device Restart Device Are you sure you want to perform a Restart _ Force Cool Restart a a Parameter description Restart Device You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally Buttons Yes Click to Yes th
274. packets valid or invalid received from the server The number of malformed RADIUS Access Response packets received from the server Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length Bad authenticators or Message Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses The number of RADIUS Access Response radiusAuthClientExtBadAut packets containing invalid authenticators or henticators Message Authenticator attributes received from the server The number of RADIUS packets that were radiusAuthClientExtUnknow received with unknown types from the nTypes server on the authentication port and dropped The number of RADIUS packets that were radiusAuthClientExtPackets received from the server on the Dropped authentication port and dropped for some other reason radiusAuthClientExtAccess The number of RADIUS Access Request Requests packets sent to the server This does not radiusAuthClientExtAccess Accepts radiusAuthClientExtAccess Rejects radiusAuthClientExtAccess Challenges radiusAuthClientExtMalform edAccessResponses User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 224 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com include retransmissions Access The number of RADIUS Access Request Tx Retransmissi radiusAuthClientExtAccess packets retransmitted to the RADIUS Retransmissions ons authentication server The number of RADIUS Access Request packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or received
275. permitted The default value is Disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled State Specify the port state of this port The allowed values are Enabled To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module Disabled To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module The default value is Enabled Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE Buttons Apply Click to save changes User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 17 WWW VvIVOoOTeEK com Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the ACL Port Configuration or clear them b
276. play the STP Port status in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Spanning Tree Port Statistics 2 Ifyou want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the STP Bridges Figure 4 8 3 The STP Statistics STP Statistics do Home Port Statistics Auto refresh E Ea Transmitted Received Discarded Port MSTP RSTP STP TCN MSTP RSTP STP TCN Unknown Illegal 1 7764 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description Port The switch port number of the logical STP port MSTP The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Buttons Auto refresh B z Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Clear Clears the counters for the selected port Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 244 4 9 IPMC WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 4 9 1 IGMP Snooping 4 9 1 1 Status After you co
277. pped to the MSTI The VLANs must be separated with comma and or space A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI An unused MSTI should just be left empty l e not having any VLANs mapped to it This section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority configurations and possibly change them as well Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping parameters in the web interface 1 2 3 4 Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Mapping Specify the configuration identification parameters in the field Specify the VLANs Mapped blank field Click the save to save the setting lf you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 9 2 The MSTI Configuration MSTI Configuration Home MSTI Mapping Add VLANs separated by spaces or comma Unmapped VLANs are mapped to the CIST The default bridge instance Configuration Identification Configuration Name 00 40 c7 01 02 03 Configuration Revision o MSTI Mapping MSTI MSTI1 MSTI2 MSTI3 MST14 MSTI5 MSTI6 MSTI7 VLANs Mapped Parameter description User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 106 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Configuration Identification Configuration Name The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping Bridges must share the name and revision see below as well as the VLAN to MSTI mapping configuration in order to share
278. q 2 time Oms icmp_seq 3 time Oms icmp_seq 4 time Oms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad You can configure the following properties of the issued ICMP packets User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 2 6 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 5 3 VeriPHY This section is used for running the VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that VeriPHY is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running VeriPHY Therefore running VeriPHY on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete Web Interface To configure a VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Click Start Figure 5 3 The VeriPHY VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Home VeriPHY Port aty Sen Cable Status Port Pair A Length A Pair B Length B Pair C Length C Pair D Length D 1 2 3 4 5 Parameter description Port The port where you are requesting VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 2 7 WWW VvIvoT
279. queues are congested 3 16 1 Port Classification The section allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch ports and the settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure the QoS Port Classification parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Classification 2 Scroll to select QoS class DP Level PCP and DEI parameters 3 Click the save to save the setting 4 If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values Figure 3 16 1 The QoS Configuration QoS Ingress Port Classification Home Port Classification Port CoS DPL PCP DEI Tag Class DSCP Based Address Mode om H E L i 1 ov ov ov oly Disabled Source M 2 oly olv olv oly Disabled C Source M 3 oly oly oly olv Disabled Source M 4 ol ov ov ov Disabled Source M 23 lV ov oN oly Disabled G Source M 24 ov ov olv ol Disabled Source M 25 ov oN ov o y Disabled a Source 26 olv ol o Y ol Disabled Soir M User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 151 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Parameter description Port The port number for which the configuration below applies CoS Controls the default class of service All frames are classified to a CoS There is a one to one mapping between CoS queue and priority
280. r 4 0 W Class 2 Max power 7 0 W Class 3 Max power 15 4 W Class 4 Max power 30 0 W Power Requested The Power Requested shows the requested amount of power the PD wants to be reserved e Power Allocated The Power Allocated shows the amount of power the switch has allocated for the PD Power Used The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using Current Used The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using Priority The Priority shows the port s priority configured by the user Port Status The Port Status shows the port s status The status can be one of the following values PoE not available No PoE chip found PoE not supported for the port User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 260 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com PoE turned OFF PoE disabled PoE is disabled by user PoE turned OFF Power budget exceeded The total requested or used power by the PDs exceeds the maximum power the Power Supply can deliver and port s with the lowest priority is are powered down No PD detected No PD detected for the port PoE turned OFF PD overload The PD has requested or used more power than the port can deliver and is powered down PoE turned OFF PD is off Invalid PD PD detected but is not working correctly Buttons Auto refresh Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh
281. r device You can find the product label in and then click on the Retresh Devices ci raanbotom part of your GEYWICE buttmn If you enabled the onboard DHCP server on the PoE switch you can browse it For instance type http 192 168 1 1 in the address row in a browser it will display the following screen and ask you to enter a username and password in order to login and access authentication The default username is admin and password is admin For the first time to use please enter the default username and password and then click the lt Login gt button The login process now is completed In this login menu you have to input the complete username and password respectively the AW GEV 264A will not give you a shortcut to username automatically This looks inconvenient but safer The AW GEV 264A allows two or more users to manage the switch using the administrator s identity The configuration changes made will take effect depending on who made the last configuration change Figure 1 The login page Y VIVOTEK AW GEV 2644 185 admin Login User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 14 NOTE When you login the Switch WEB CLI to manager You must first type the Username of the admin Use admin as the default password so when you type after the end Username please press enter Management page to enter WEB CLI When you login the PoE switch series Web UI management you can use both ipv4 ipv6 login to manage
282. r in the web interface Click Configuration Security Switch Users Click Add new user Specify the User Name parameter Click Apply AUNE Figure 3 5 1 1 The Users configuration Users Configuration Home Users User Name Privilege Level admin 15 Add User Home Users User Settings User Name Password Password again Privilege Level 1 M Parameter description e User Name The name identifying the user This is also a link to Add Edit User e Password To type the password The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 39 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Password again To type the password again You must type the same password again in the field Privilege Level The privilege level of the user The allowed range is 1 to 15 If the privilege level value is 15 it can access all groups i e that is granted the fully control of the device But others value need to refer to each group privilege level User s privilege should be same or greater than the group privilege level to have the access of that group By default setting most groups privilege level 5 has the read only access and privilege level 10 has the read write access And the system maintenance software upload factory defaults and etc need user privilege level 15 Generally the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account privilege level
283. raffic Monitor Home gt Maintenance gt Traffic Monito Switch Surveillance Management lt AW GEV 264A 185 Qt mm 2014 12 16 C ony week P swen P ipcamatncoder P we P pc P cus FE _ Device List Graphic View lt g Surveillance Network lt O Monitor v gt Traffic Chart gt Instant Throughput a Diagnostics lt Maintenance lt Time 0 23 4 amp 7 8 8 1 2 13 34 is 96 97 98 49 20 21 n 23 Hour User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 324 10 2 Instant Throughput VIVOTEK WWW VIY OTEK COM This page displays a visual chart of network traffic of all the devices managed by the PoE switch Numbers are shown in Mbit s Web interface To view the throughput through a specific port 1 Click Surveillance gt Monitor gt and Instant Throughput 2 Click on a specific device on the device list to reveal its instant throughput Wait for a few seconds until the throughput numbers are displayed as a line chart throughput is shown on the screen Figure 10 1 2 Instant Throughput A single port s traffic AW GEV 264A 185 Instant Th roughput Home Instant Throughput Switch Surveillance switch Ipcam amp Encoder V NVR ip device cms Device List Management lt AW GEV 264A 185 AW GEV 264A 185 192 168 41 250 AW GEV 264A 185 f Port 2 said oi ns 15 lt Graphic View lt AW GEV 264A 185 192 168 41 250 a FE8171 48 Surveillance Network lt 100M IPR161 192 168 40 11 90M
284. rames matching the ACE are filtered Rate Limiter Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 16 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Redirect Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Mirror Specify the mirror operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are mirrored Disabled Frames received on the port are not mirrored The default value is Disabled CPU Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU CPU Once Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU Counter The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Conflict Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE The specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Buttons Auto refresh eB Combined v Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 217 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 4 5 1 3 ARP Inspection The section describes to configure the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table contains up to 1024 entries and is sorted first by
285. ransmission between neighbours it is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibility of the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated The recommended value is 4 times given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted when an LLDP frame with new information is received It should be noted that LLDP MED and the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to run on links between LLDP MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices and as such does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements including Network Connectivity Devices or other types of links Coordinates Location Latitude Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator Longitude Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0 180 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime meridian User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 122 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Altitude Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within 32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits It is possible to select between two altitude types floors or meters Meters Representing meters of Altitude defined by
286. rent state of the server This field takes one of the following values Disabled The server is disabled Not Ready The server is enabled but IP communication is not yet up and running Ready The server is enabled IP communication is up and running and the RADIUS module is ready to accept accounting attempts Dead X seconds left Accounting attempts were made to this server but it did not reply within the configured timeout The server has temporarily been disabled but will get re enabled when the dead time expires The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed in parentheses This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 222 WWW VvIVvoTeK comMm 4 5 2 2 RADIUS Details This section shows you an detailed statistics for a particular RADIUS server Web Interface To configure a RADIUS Details Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify Port which want to check 2 Click Security AAA then RADIUS Overview 3 Checked Auto refresh 4 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics or clear all information when you click Clear fresh Figure 4 5 2 2 The RADIUS Authentication Statistics Server RADIUS Authentication Statistics Home gt Monite t RADIUS Details Auto refresh a Ea Server 1 RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server 1 Receive Packets Transmit Packets Access Accepts 0 Access Requests 0 Access Rejects 0 Access
287. resnnctne ssesmriod asresainnid niei Ean aE EENET ENE NEVENA REENA anarei 144 3 152 Protocol Dased VLAN curiamo einari inei a Aa a a eas E 146 SOL EPO OOO a A TE T ATE TT 146 3 15 22 GUP 10 VLAN orsina ES A veadanenesceuseaceon 148 Jlo 1 SUIS Es Ch VLAN sarrerea renin nE T E E ancaeunececacauacoeenmanaent 149 eT D o e E E E E E N A E E E 151 IEL Por Glass MCA NO Nea E 151 IL PON POITE perseen EE AEE A E EEO EEA E ET EENE EN 154 3716 4 Port Scheduler S ssnin E EES 156 JIES POON PINE pE E EE E E AEE T EAT 159 316 6 Port Tae REM a iii E ejiis sainia aai E a E aa A AEE ESTS 162 sa OE ga e A E E TA A E EA A E eee E E A A A A 165 FUS D CPE aaO ae E EE E AE E E E E E 167 JAGO PSC Transla O eeaeee e S A NE 169 3 16 10 DSCP Classi Ca tl On esascs sniene aina EEE OE EEEE ENE EETA EAEE ENEE Adia 171 3 16 11 QoS Control List Config Uration sseisssisissnsesresssisivessiniss savarina tininda na daS NaN NaN Aaaa ai 173 3 16 12 Storm CONTO sere cosanssacwonscesatnmcsancetseannnevonanesisnsanaesneiounvennectansamsesncaceoaenecausnsaoaionrseasaimecdnaneoacuneresnnna sie 178 e PAN OF E T E E E E EE T A E E 179 3 18 UP IP ricine E E N annuals eanvandsenaenanmrsunneses 181 CHAPTER SWITCH MONITOR aseszccesceasenctensedananetriesanteyanacsatacaasegnaensvendascasenuesaivemetdsom oneness 183 PD SY SUC E ances on E AAEE A E N A E E A E R A N E E A A E 183 A O ara E E E T E E A E AE 183 a A 00 E A A A E E A ee 185 A OG een A cues ean abecanerecah cadeeseceensenaaa
288. rganizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from Ox00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype Ox0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 NoTE Special character and underscore _ are not allowed Adding a New Group to VLAN mapping entry Click to add a new entry in mapping table An empty row is added to the table Frame Type Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Protocol Group Mapping information by manual User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 147 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 15 2 2 Group to VLAN This sectio
289. ricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Queue Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 160 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Queue Shaper Excess Controls whether the queue is allowed to use excess bandwidth Queue Scheduler Weight Controls the weight for this queue The default value is 17 This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Queue Scheduler Percent Shows the weight in percent for this queue This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted Port Shaper Enable Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port Port Shaper Rate Controls the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 161 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 16 6 Port Tag Remarking The Section provides user to get an overview of QoS Egress Port Tag Remarking for all switch ports Others the ports belong to the currently select
290. ription The section describes to configure the Port s alias or any descriptions for the Port Identity It provides user to write down an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application Web Interface To configure an Port Description in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Port then Port Description 2 Specify the detail Port alias or description an alphanumeric string describing the full name and version identification for the system s hardware type software version and networking application 3 Click Apply Figure 3 3 1 The Port Configuration Port Description for Switch Home Ports Description Port Description 23 24 25 26 Parameter description Port This is the logical port number for this row Description Enter up to 47 characters to be descriptive name for identifies this port Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 31 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm 3 4 DHCP The section describes to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch The DHCP Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network 3 4 1 Server 3 4 1 1 Mode This page configures global mode and VLAN mode to enable disable DHCP server per system and per VLAN Web Interface T
291. rmation in the web interface 1 Click Monitor IGMP Snooping Group Information 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh a entry of the IGMP Snooping Groups Information 4 Click lt lt or gt gt to move to previous or next entry Figure 4 9 1 2 The I GMP Snooping Groups Information IGMP Snooping Group Information Home Groups Information Auto refresh _ E Start from VLAN 1 and group address 224 0 0 0 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLAN ID Groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 No more entries Parameter description Navigating the IGMP Group Table Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table The Start from VLAN and group input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the IGMP Group Table Clicking the button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next IGMP Group Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached
292. rols the rate for the port shaper The default value is This value is restricted to 1000000 when the Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 when the Unit is Mbps Port Shaper Unit Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 158 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm 3 16 5 Port Shaping This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports Others the user could get all detail information ot the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Shapers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Shapers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Shapers Figure 3 16 5 The QoS Egress Port Shapers QoS Egress Port Shapers Home Port Shaping Port Shapers Q7 Port Click the Port index to set the QoS disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled Egress Port Shapers disabled disabled 3 disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled disabled QoS gress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Home Port Scheduler Port Port1 Y Scheduler Mode Strict Priority Queue Shaper Queue Enable Rate Unit Excess C 500 lt M C 0 C 500 kbps M C 1 C 500 kbps Y E 2 LA 500 kbps V C
293. rt to previously saved values Figure 3 18 The UPnP Configuration UPnP Configuration Home UPnP Mode Disabled M Advertising Duration 100 Parameter description These parameters are displayed on the UPnP Configuration page Mode Indicates the UPnP operation mode Possible modes are Enabled Enable UPnP mode operation Disabled Disable UPnP mode operation When the mode is enabled two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets to CPU The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled TTL The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 Advertising Duration The duration carried in SSDP packets is used to inform a control point or control points how often it or they should receive an SSDP advertisement message from this switch If a control point does not receive any message within the duration it will think that the switch no longer exists Due to the unreliable nature of UDP in the standard it is recommended that such refreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one half of the advertising duration In the implementation the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one half of the advertising duration minus 30 seconds Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400 Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved User Manual rev 1 2 Au
294. ry associated with the control entry Sample Start The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 230 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com packets received Broadcast The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address Multicast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address CRCErrors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Undersize The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets Oversize The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions o
295. s The will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text No more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the button to start over Port Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed e VLAN ID VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted MAC Address User MAC address of the entry IP Address User IP address of the entry Buttons User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 218 WWW VvIvoTeK comMm Auto refresh es Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page lt lt Updates the system log entries to the first available entry ID gt gt Updates the system log entry to the next available entry ID 4 5 1 4 IP Source Guard Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table is sorted first by port then by VLAN ID then by IP address and then by MAC address Web Interface To configure a Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Security Network IP Source Guard 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics 4 Specify the Start from port VLAN ID IP Address and entries per page Figure 4 5 1 4 The Dynamic IP Source Table Dynamic IP Source Guard Table liome gt Monitor gt Security gt Networ
296. s The Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is a vendor neutral Link Layer protocol in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices for advertising their identity capabilities and neighbors on a IEEE 802 local area network principally wired Ethernet The protocol is formally referred to by the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery specified in standards document IEEE 802 1AB 3 10 1 LLDP Configuration You can per port to do the LLDP configuration and the detail parameters the settings will take effect immediately This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings Web Interface To configure LLDP Click LLDP configuration Modify LLDP timing parameters Set the required mode for transmitting or receiving LLDP messages Specify the information to include in the TLV field of advertised messages Click Apply am cat el Figure 3 10 1 The LLDP Configuration LLDP Configuration Home LLDP LLDP Parameters Tx Interval 30 seconds Tx Hold 4 times Tx Delay 2 seconds Tx Reinit 2 seconds LLDP Port Configuration Optional TLVs Port Mode CDP aware Port Descr Sys Name Sys Descr Sys Capa Mgmt Addr wl fo 1 enabled C 2 cabled O 3 sabe V O User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 118 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 23 Enabled 24 Enabled i 25 Enabled NM C 26 Enabled hd Parameter description LLDP Parameters Tx Interval The switch periodically
297. s it will stay in the blocked state until the hold time measured in seconds expires If all user modules have decided to allow this MAC address to forward and aging is enabled the Port Security module will periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic If the age period measured in seconds expires and no frames have been seen the MAC address will be removed from the MAC table Otherwise a new age period will begin If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely a dash will be shown Buttons User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 209 WWW VvIVvoTeEK comMm Port 1 Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 210 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 4 5 1 2 NAS 4 5 2 1 1 Switch The section describes to show the each port NAS status information of the switch The status includes Admin State Port State Last Source Last ID QoS Class and Port VLAN ID Web Interface To configure a NAS Switch Status Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Security Network NAS then Port 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 5 2 2 1 The Network Access Server Switch Status Network Access Server Switch Status Home Switch Auto refresh Port Admin State Port State Last Source Last I
298. s 187 LFP WEA OE aea E E aauiudeaneeatesetectoneeas 189 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 9 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com A 2 Green Eterne sT 190 4 2 1 POM Power SAVINGS onenen E E E octuaniewteene dia eeomae 190 AS PONS sapeni n E 191 4 3 1 Traffic OvervieW sacecmaatncienquansvseuatanadnnnoannacaanteacabassanndasareqmeiasacanderqnaesseuadasenatasenncnsavansdbursanacasaerniearancnnisens 191 AS O aS IC E E E E E E A AEE A EEE EET 193 ae r AE E eee E E E A E E 195 ASA Derailed SA OS eaei a en E ee 197 AA DHCP rosna EEE T T 200 AAT SON O eo E E a E A EEA ened e 200 AA LA EAM SS oei E E EA E N 200 aal e BINON eeraa E E EN estat encotoree 201 rar o DECINE IE poaren a A A A EA A E E EE EA AAA AA A 202 a e PE e a E A E E A E E E EE E E A A 203 A A 3 Detailed Statisti OS sroennecioniesuors dinsin E EE E E E 204 AS SO CUONIVY occa carctnceweresncnceaesicawvesusnaekecdniediesiccunandewendwanedsauhnendeesaweassceuscaeeedaeasanasedsneheindeedansasadwarcaeesuonweneeseceves 206 AS L NEWN aeaea sage ou geese naps sen E AAA S 206 Tadek PO OO UY aa E 206 Eo MZ INP a E A A E tone sacstie pasate medusa oaacane asec 211 VAIS eB Cl ON gaa A E E N 218 4 te Source GUWA caste cetiatte cen dcettosiscecannteesnaddessonndddeoeueautasatyacadeotuataddecuenaisedenondadsntasesindaeweapiaisaes 219 AE A a ee eee ee ee ee ee ee T 221 4 5 2 1 RADIUS Overvi W sien cosncocacossessuedsncysucsbabsusmnbavcwnsudnnd ed se suneivacensavsacensesinnadabssneunssunntenwcuenedenedesvuss 221
299. s class include provision of location identifier including ECS E911 information embedded L2 switch support inventory management LLDP MED Capabilities LLDP MED Capabilities describes the neighborhood unit s LLDP MED capabilities The possible capabilities are LLDP MED capabilities Network Policy Location Identification Extended Power via MDI PSE Extended Power via MDI PD Inventory O oO A W N gt a 7 Reserved Application Type Application Type indicating the primary function of the application s defined for this network policy advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device The possible application types are shown below 1 Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications 2 Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signalling than for the voice media 3 Guest Voice to support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest users and User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 252 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services 4 Guest Voice Signalling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the guest voice
300. s default settings to values that are compatible with your network You may also need to establish a default gateway between the switch and management stations that exist on another network segment Configure the switch managed IP information on this page Configure IP basic settings control IP interfaces and IP routes The maximum number of interfaces supported is 8 and the maximum number of routes is 32 Web Interface To configure an IP address in the web interface 1 Click Configuration System IP 2 Click Add Interface then you can create new Interface on the switch 3 Click Add Route then you can create new Route on the switch 4 Click Apply Figure 3 1 2 The IP configuration IP Configuration Home IP Mode Host M DNS Server Configured v 168 95 1 1 DNS Proxy IP Interfaces IPv4 DHCP IPv4 IPv6 Current Mask Mask Delete VLAN Enable Fallback Lease Address Length Address Length C 1 C 0 192 168 1 1 24 IP Routes Delete Network Mask Length Gateway Next Hop VLAN 0 0 0 0 0 192 168 1 254 0 192 168 1 0 24 192 168 1 1 0 Add Route User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 18 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Parameter description IP Configuration Mode Configure whether the IP stack should act as a Host or a Router In Host mode IP traffic between interfaces will not be routed In Router mode traffic is routed between all interfaces DNS Server This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch The
301. s enabled and the value of max dynamic client is equal to O it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static entries on the specific port User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 85 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 2 5 2 4 2 Static Table The section describes to configure the Static IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries Web Interface To configure a Static IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Apply Figure 3 4 2 5 2 The Static IP Source Guard Table Static IP Source Guard Table Home Static Table Delete Port VLAN ID IP Address MAC address Add New Entry Static IP Source Guard Table cee Static Table Delete Port VLAN ID IP Address MAC address Add New Entry Parameter description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port The logical port for the settings e VLAN ID The vian id for the settings IP Address Allowed Source IP address MAC address Allowed Source MAC address e Adding new entry Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table Specify the Port VLAN ID IP address and IP Mask for the new entry Click Save Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally
302. s enabled by at least the Limit Control user module and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded No MAC addresses can be learned on the port until it is administratively re opened on the Limit Control configuration Web page MAC Count Current Limit The two columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked and the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port respectively If no user modules are enabled on the port the Current column will show a dash If the Limit Control user module is not enabled on the port the Limit column will show a dash User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 207 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm Indicates the number of currently learned MAC addresses forwarding as well as blocked on the port If no user modules are enabled on the port a dash will be shown Buttons Auto refresh EA Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 208 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK com 4 5 1 1 2 Port This section shows the MAC addresses secured by the Port Security module Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames fr
303. s is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds EAPOL Timeout Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports Aging Period This setting applies to the following modes i e modes using the Port Security functionality to secure MAC addresses e Single 802 1X e Multi 802 1X e MAC Based Auth When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses the Port Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regular intervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time This parameter controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802 1X based mode this is not so critical since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next reauthentication which will fail But if reauthentication is not enabled the only way to free resources is by aging the entries For ports in MAC based Auth mode reauthentication doesn t cause direct communication between the switch and the client so this will not detect whether the client is still attached or not and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry Hold Time This setting applies to the follow
304. s the status of powered devices and report disconnection issue when the powered device cannot be reached AW GEN M2AH E A ieee a i a Fori 25 Pia a AW GEV 764A 185 ge Re direct Link 3 PoE Config 8 2 Floor View In this page the administrator can place a device per time onto the custom image which you have already uploaded by dragging and dropping markers in the device list You can upload up to 20 map files with the limitation of 256KB in file size each Web interface To configure the surveillance Floor View in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Graphic View gt Floor Plan gt and Floor View 2 Select a floor map you uploaded You can prepare and upload one or multiple floor maps in the Surveillance gt Floor Plan gt Floor Image window AW GEV 2644 185 Floor Image Management Switch Surveillance Total 20 files 4 Management lt Add Floor 2 Graphic View v tat oo gt Topology View Name Floor Plan Y Add gt Floor view gt Floorlmage gt Google Map Select z Surveillance Network lt 3 You then select a device on the Device List by a single click A similar bubble icon will appear on screen Click and drag the icon to a preferred location on the map 4 Repeat the above process until you finish the map setup and click the Apply button With multiple maps in your deployment e g different floor or building select a different floor view from the pull down menu on top a
305. saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 111 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 8 5 MSTI Ports The section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well An MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured on and applicable to the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options It contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI Port Configuration parameters in the web interface Click Configuration Spanning Tree MSTI Ports Scroll to select the MST1 or other MSTI Port Click Get to set the detail parameters of the MSTI Ports Scroll to set all parameters of the MSTI Port configuration Click the save to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values oO a Figure 3 8 5 The MSTI Port Configuration STP CIST Port Configuration Home MSTI Ports Select MSTI 2 MSTI Normal Ports Configuration Port Path Cost Priority j gt v lt gt M 1 Auto N 128 V 2 Auto M 128 V 3 Auto M 128 V 24 Auto M 128 Y 25 Auto N 128 V 26 Auto N 128 V Parameter description User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 112 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Port The switch port number of th
306. should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 54 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 3 5 1 6 6 Views The function is used to configure SNMPv3 view The Entry index keys are OID Subtree and View Name To create a new view account please check lt Add new view gt button and enter the view information then check lt Save gt Max Group Number 28 Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree Web Interface To display the configure SNMP views in the web interface Click SNMP Views Click Add new View Specify the SNMP View parameters Click Apply If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset MERES Figure 3 5 1 6 6 The SNMP Views Configuration SNMPv3 View Configuration Home Views Delete View Name View Type OID Subtree a default_view included 1 Add New Entry SNMPv3 View Configuration Home Views Delete View Name View Type OID Subtree C default_view included W E included v Add New Entry Parameter description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belon
307. signalling than for the guest voice media 5 Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops 6 Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services 7 Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type 8 Video Signalling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signalling than for the video media Policy Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy is required by the device Can be either Defined or Unknown Unknown The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown Defined The network policy is defined TAG TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Can be Tagged or Untagged Untagged The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tagged The device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format VLAN ID VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 A v
308. stics The section describes that switch could display the QoS detailed Queuing counters for a specific switch port for the different queues for all switch ports Web Interface To Display the Queuing Counters in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Ports then QoS Statistics 2 If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 4 3 2 The Queuing Counters Overview Queuing Counters Home t Qos Statistics Auto refresh al z Qo Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Port Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx 1 56003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38635 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Qn Qn is the Queue number There are 8 QoS queues per port QO is the lowest priority queue Rx Tx The number of received and transmitted packets per queue Buttons Auto refresh EA z Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 193 WWWEVIiVva tT S Kk oaom
309. t Statistics WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole switch while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch Web Interface To show LLDP Statistics 1 Click Monitor _LLDP then click Port Statistics to show LLDP counters Click Refresh for manual update web screen 2 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen 4 Click Clear to clear all counters Figure 4 10 5 The LLDP Port Statistics information LLDP Counters Auto refresh E z LLDP Global Counters Neighbor entries were last changed Total Neighbors Entries Added Total Neighbors Entries Deleted Total Neighbors Entries Dropped Total Neighbors Entries Aged Out LLDP Statistics Local Counters Local Port TxFrames Rx Frames 1 917 0 2 0 0 3 0 0 4 0 0 5 0 0 24 0 0 25 0 0 26 0 0 Parameter description Global Counters 2011 01 01T00 00 00 00 00 28408 secs ago 0 0 0 0 Rx Errors 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Frames Discarded TLVs Discarded Neighbour entries were last changed at TLVs Unrecognized 0 0 Home Org Discarded 0 0 Port Statistics Age Outs 0 0 It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added It also shows the time elapsed since the last change was detected Total Neighbours Entries Added Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Total Neighbours
310. t be identical and consist of ASCII characters in the range 0 3 which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range 0 3 RADI US Assigned VLAN Enabled When RADIUS Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access Accept packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated If present and valid the port s Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID the port will be set to be a member of that VLAN ID and the port will be forced into VLAN unaware mode Once assigned all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the RADIUS assigned VLAN ID If re authentication fails or the RADIUS Access Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN ID or it s invalid or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port the port s VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID which may be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS assigned This option is only available for single client modes i e e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X For trouble shooting VLAN assignments use the Monitor VLANs VLAN Membership and VLAN Port pages These pages show which modules have temporarily overridden the current Port VLAN configuration RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used
311. tal number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length 128 255 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length e 256 511 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length 512 1023 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length 1024 1588 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1588 octets in length Buttons Auto refresh _ Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page immediately lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the Statistics table i e the entry with the lowest ID gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 229 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 4 5 3 1 2 History This section provides an overview of RMON History entries Each page shows up to 99 entries from the History table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning o
312. tatus for all PoE ports The section show all port Power Over Ethernet Status Web Interface To show LLDP EEE neighbors 1 Click Monitor LLDP PoE 2 Display Power Over Ethernet Status Information 3 Click Auto refresh for auto update web screen Figure 4 10 3 The LLDP Neighbors EEE information LLDP Neighbor Power Over Ethernet Information Home PoE Auto refresh E Local Port Power Type Power Source Power Priority Maximum Power No PoE neighbor information found Parameter description e Local Port The port for this switch on which the LLDP frame was received Power Type The Power Type represents whether the device is a Power Sourcing Entity PSE or Power Device PD If the Power Type is unknown it is represented as Reserved Power Source The Power Source represents the power source being utilized by a PSE or PD device If the device is a PSE device it can either run on its Primary Power Source or its Backup Power Source If it is unknown whether the PSE device is using its Primary Power Source or its Backup Power Source it is indicated as Unknown If the device is a PD device it can either run on its local power supply or it can use the PSE as power source It can also use both its local power supply and the PSE If it is unknown what power supply the PD device is using it is indicated as Unknown Power Priority Power Priority represents the priority of the PD device or the power priority assoc
313. tch Account Setting web page for a common user name and password for multiple managed devices Click on a device s MAC address to configure the General Network setting Click the Apply button for the configuration to take effect A click on the IP address opens a web console with the IP camera or video server Figure 7 4 1 Surveillance Camera amp Encoder Camera amp Encorder Device Ahome Camana Encordir amp 0 7 a i o o Resto e Default Translate dynamic IP to static IP Device List records per page Search Select Status Model Name Device Name MAC IP Address IP State Version C7 On Line PD8136 PD8136 00 02 D1 29 64 CF 169 254 100 207 Static 0101b a On Line IP8364 IP8364 00 02 D1 28 72 E7 169 254 114 231 Dynamic 0101a On Line 1P8337H 00 02 D1 27 B2 98 169 254 178 152 Static 0101a On Line FD8134 aabbec 00 02 D1 28 C9 AB 169 254 201 171 Static 0301c a On Line IP8335H Mega Pixel Network 00 02 D1 2D F0 F6 169 254 240 246 Static 0204c Camera C7 On Line 1P8362 00 02 D1 2D 07 FD 169 254 7 253 Static 0200d On Line 1P8362 00 02 D1 2D 08 D4 169 254 8 212 Static 0200d Showing 1 to 7 of 7 entrie Batch Account Setti ng Home Camera amp Encorder User name Password Confirm password 19 records per page Search Select Model Name Device Name MAC IP Address a C PD8136 PD8136_1 00 02 169 254 100 207 D1 29 64 CF C IP8362 IP8362_1 00 02 192 168 0 3 D1 2D 08 D4 Showing 1 to 2 of 2 entries User Manual rev 1 2
314. ted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors Rx Undersize The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC Rx Oversize The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC Rx Fragments The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC RxJjJabber The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port Transmit Error Counters Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Auto refresh To evoke the auto refresh to refresh the Queuing Counters automatically Upper right icon Refresh clear You can click them for refresh the Port Detail Statistics or clear them by manual Buttons Auto refresh EA z Port1 W Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 se
315. ted by the page header Web Interface To display the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface 1 Click Configuration QoS Port Schedulers 2 Display the QoS Egress Port Schedulers Figure 3 16 4 The QoS Egress Port Schedules QoS Egress Port Schedulers Home Click the Port index to set the QoS Diii iii Egress Port Schedulers Q4 Strict Priority 2 Strict Priority 3 Strict Priority ODS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Home Port Port1 M Sdheduler Mode Strict Priority v Queue Shaper Queue Enable Rate Unit 500 gt M 0 C 500 kbps M 1 O 500 kbps M 2 500 kbps M 3 500 kbps M 4 a 500 kbps 5 C 500 kbps v 6 C 500 kbps Y 7 es 500 kbps M Port Shaper Enable Rate Unit 500 kbps User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 Port Scheduler Q5 Port Scheduler Excess E BAI O oO o o o o o 156 WWW VvIvoTrTeK comMm QoS Egress Port Scheduler and Shapers Port 1 Home Port Scheduler Port Port 1 M Scheduler Mode Weighted A Queue Shaper Queue Scheduler Queue Enable Rate Unit Weight Percent a C 500 vi C If you select the scheduler 0 Ei 500 kbps Y 17 mode with wighted then the screen will change as 1 500 kbps dd iB 17 the figure 2 500 kbps V 17 3 C 500 kbps M C 17 17 3 O 500 kbps M 17 17 5 C 500 kbps V o 17 17 6 C 500 kbps v C 7 C 500 kbps M Port Shaper Enable Rat
316. tes v End Time settings Month Jan v Date 1 v Year 2000 Hours 0 M Minutes v Offset settings Offset 1 1 1440 Minutes Parameter description Time Configuration Clock Source There are two modes for configuring how the Clock Source from Select Use Local Settings Clock Source from Local Time Select Use NTP Server Clock Source from NTP Server System Date Show the current time of the system The year of system date limits between 2011 and 2037 Time Zone Configuration Time Zone Lists various Time Zones world wide Select appropriate Time Zone from the drop down and click Apply to set Acronym User can set the acronym of the time zone This is a User configurable acronym to identify the time zone Range Up to 16 characters Daylight Saving Time Configuration Daylight Saving Time This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration Select Disable to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration Select Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year Select Non Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration Default Disabled User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 23 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm Recurring Configuration Start time settings Week Select the starting week number Day
317. the actual power consumption for a given port exceeds the reserved power for that port The ports are shut down according to the ports priority If two ports have the same priority the port with the highest port number is shut down 2 Reserved Power In this mode the ports are shut down when total reserved powered exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more power than available from the power supply Primary and Backup Power Source Some switches support having two PoE power supplies One is used as primary power source and one as backup power source If the switch doesn t support backup power supply only the primary power supply settings will be shown In case that the primary power source fails the backup power source will take over For being able to determine the amount User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 128 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK comMm of power the PD may use it must be defined what amount of power the primary and backup power sources can deliver Valid values are in the range 0 to 2000 Watts Port This is the logical port number for this row Ports that are not PoE capable are grayed out and thus impossible to configure PoE for PoE Mode The PoE Mode represents the PoE operating mode for the port Disabled PoE disabled for the port PoE Enables PoE IEEE 802 3af Class 4 PDs limited to 15 4W PoE Enables PoE IEEE 802 3at Class 4 P
318. the index of Statistics entry Data Source ifil ndex The port ID which wants to be monitored Drop The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network Pkts The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received Broad cast User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 228 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address e Multi cast The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address CRC Errors The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error Under size The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets Over size The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets Frag The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC Jabb The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC Coll The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment 64 The to
319. the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 261 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEK comMm 4 12 MAC Table MAC Address Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address Web Interface To Display MAC Address Table in the web interface 1 Click Monitor Dynamic MAC Table 2 Specify the VLAN and MAC Address 3 Display MAC Address Table Figure 4 12 The MAC Address Table Home MAC Table Auto refresh g aA z Start from VLAN 1 Type and MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLAN MAC Address CPU 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 26 Static 1 00 40 C7 01 02 03 Y Static 1 33 33 00 00 00 01 v v Static 1 33 33 00 00 00 02 vY vY Static 1 33 33 FF 01 02 03 wv vY Dynamic 1 3C 97 0E 16 EB 7E v Static 1 FF FF FF FF FF FF W YWAV 7S 7SSS SSAHYHAGYFAHYFH YF YF YF YF YF FAY YF YF YF AYH YF YF AGYH YH GF A Parameter description Navigating the MAC Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow th
320. tion Shows the date and time of the last authentication of the client successful as well as unsuccessful Buttons Auto refresh Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page Clear This button is available in the following modes e Force Authorized e Force Unauthorized e Port based 802 1X e Single 802 1X Clear All Click to clear the counters for the selected port This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Clear This Click to clear both the port counters and all of the attached client s counters The Last Client will not be cleared however This button is available in the following modes e Multi 802 1X e MAC based Auth X Click to clear only the currently selected client s counters User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 215 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com 4 5 1 3 ACL Status The section describes how to shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch Web Interface To display the ACL status in the web interface Click Monitor Network and then ACL status If you want to auto refresh the information then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the ACL Status Fig
321. tion describe Protocol based VLAN The Switch support Protocol include Ethernet LLC SNAP Protocol LLC The Logical Link Control LLC data communication protocol layer is the upper sub layer of the Data Link Layer which is itself layer 2 just above the Physical Layer in the seven layer OSI reference model It provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network protocols IP IPX Decnet and Appletalk to coexist within a multipoint network and to be transported over the same network media and can also provide flow control and automatic repeat request ARQ error management mechanisms SNAP The Subnetwork Access Protocol SNAP is a mechanism for multiplexing on networks using IEEE 802 2 LLC more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8 bit 802 2 Service Access Point SAP fields SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values it also supports vendor private protocol identifier spaces It is used with IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 4 IEEE 802 5 IEEE 802 11 and other IEEE 802 physical network layers as well as with non IEEE 802 physical network layers such as FDDI that use 802 2 LLC 3 15 2 1 Protocol to Group This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the selected stack switch unit switch Web Interface To configure Protocol based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Cli
322. tisement reference IPv6 RA JPG 33 33 00 00 00 02 Destination MAC for IPv6 Router Solicitation reference IPv6 RS JPG 33 33 FF 73 01 29 Destination MAC for IPv6 Neighbor Solicitation reference IPv6 DAD JPG 33 33 FF A8 01 01 your switch MAC address for IPv6 global IP FF FF FF FF FF FF for Broadcast User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 263 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 4 13 VLANs 4 13 1 VLAN Membership This page provides an overview of membership status of VLAN users The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Web Interface To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface 1 Click Monitor VLANs VLAN membership 2 Scroll the bar to choice which VLANs would like to show up 3 Click Refresh to update the state Figure 4 13 1 VLAN Membership Status for Combined users VLAN Membership Status for Combined users Home Membership Auto refresh Faas al Combined Y Start from VLAN 1 with 20 entries per page Port Members VLAN ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 SV SVN A A A er A A ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee oe ee ee ee ee Parameter description VLAN USER VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID Currently we support the following VLAN user types CLI Web SNMP These are referred to as
323. try 3 Click Add to upload When done a snapshot will be available on screen 4 If you need to remove an existing floor map select its checkbox and click Delete to remove Figure 8 3 1 Floor I mage AW GEV 264A 185 Floor Image Management tone me iann Total 20 files Used 2 file s Free 18 file s Management lt 2 Graphic View v Add Floor Image Dw RRR name gt Topology View asa Floor Plan gt Floor View gt Floor image Select File Name Image gt Google Map floor1 Surveillance Network lt 1 we _ E Monitor lt _ gt a Diagnostics lt Maintenance lt m floor2 jpg 9 i ss TE elite Eee a ape User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 318 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 8 4 Google Map On this page you can view a realistic representation of devices through the Google map This Map View applies in wide area outdoor deployments The preconditions for using this function are 1 The client computer having a web session with the PoE switch must have an Internet connection Web interface To configure Surveillance Map View in the web interface 1 Click Surveillance gt Graphic View gt Google Map 2 On the Google map move to your location and zoom in to a preferred view To move on the screen click and hold down your left mouse button to move to a preferred direction You can also key in the address you have in mind in the Search box e g Sunset Boulevard Los Angeles etc The GPS l
324. twork Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favour of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above operEdge state flag Operational flag describing whether the port is connecting directly to edge devices No Bridges attached Transition to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports having operEdge true than for other ports The value of this flag is based on AdminEdge and AutoEdge fields This flag is displayed as Edge in Monitor gt Spanning Tree gt STP Detailed Bridge Status AdminEdge Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized AutoEdge Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU s are received on the port or not Restricted Role If enabled causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even if it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected If set it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influence the spanning tree active topology possibly because t
325. unk ports hybrid ports have these abilities e Can be configured to be VLAN tag unaware C tag aware S tag aware or S custom tag aware e ingress filtering can be controlled e ingress acceptance of frames and configuration of egress tagging can be configured independently Port VLAN Determines the port s VLAN ID a k a PVID Allowed VLANs are in the range 1 through 4095 default being 1 On ingress frames get classified to the Port VLAN if the port is configured as VLAN unaware the frame is untagged or VLAN awareness is enabled on the port but the frame is priority tagged VLAN ID 0 On egress frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get tagged if Egress Tagging configuration is set to untag Port VLAN The Port VLAN is called an Access VLAN for ports in Access mode and Native VLAN for ports in Trunk or Hybrid mode Port Type Ports in hybrid mode allow for changing the port type that is whether a frame s VLAN tag is used to classify the frame on ingress to a particular VLAN and if so which TPID it reacts on Likewise on egress the Port Type determines the TPID of the tag if a tag is required Unaware On ingress all frames whether carrying a VLAN tag or not get classified to the Port VLAN and possible tags are not removed on egress C Port User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 138 On ingress frames with a VLAN tag with TPID 0x8100 get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag If a frame is untagge
326. ure 4 5 1 3 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ACL Status Home ACL Status Auto refresh e Combined M ACL Status User Ingress Frame Action Rate Port Mirror CPU CPU Counter Conflict Port Type Limiter Redirect Once DRM All IPv4 UDP Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled Yes No 0 No CLIENT 10002 Parameter description User Indicates the ACL user Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are All The ACE will match any ingress port Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will not get matched by IP and ARP frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames I Pv4 The ACE will match all Pv4 frames I Pv4 The ACE will match all Pv4 frames I Pv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol I Pv4 UDP The ACE will match Pv4 frames with UDP protocol I Pv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol I Pv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not ICMP UDP TCP I Pv6 The ACE will match all Pv6 standard frames User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 216 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Filter F
327. uto refresh _ S Static Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 268 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 4 14 2 Protocol based VLAN 4 14 2 1 Protocol to Group This page shows you the protocols to Group Name unique for each Group mapping entries for the switch Web Interface To Display Protocol based VLAN configuration in the web interface 1 Click Monitor VCL Protocol to Group 2 Checked Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port detailed statistics Figure 4 14 1 The MAC based VLAN Membership Status for User Static Protocol to Group Mapping Table Status Home Protocol to Group Auto refresh A Frame Type Value Group Name No Group entry found Parameter description Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values 1 Ethernet 2 LLC 3 SNAP NOTE On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the preceding Frame Type selection menu Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types 1 For Ethernet Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type is called etype Valid values for etype ranges from Ox0600 Oxffff 2 For LLC Valid
328. v 1 2 Aug 2015 89 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Possible types are None Log nothing Deny Log denied entries Permit Log permitted entries ALL Log all entries Buttons Add New Entry Click to add a new VLAN to the ARP Inspection VLAN table Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 90 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm 3 5 2 5 3 Static Table The section describes to configure the Static ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch You could use the Static ARP Inspection Table configure to manage the ARP entries Web Interface To configure a Static ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface 1 Click Add new entry 2 Specify the Port VLAN ID IP Address and MAC address in the entry 3 Click Apply Figure 3 4 2 6 3 The Static ARP Inspection Table Static ARP Inspection Table Home Static Table Delete Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Add New Entry Static ARP Inspection Table Home Static Table Delete Port VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address Add New Entry Parameter description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Port The logical port for the settings e VLANID The vlan id for the settings MAC Address Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets IP Address Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets Addin
329. value in this case is comprised of two different sub values a DSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff b SSAP 1 byte long string Ox00 Oxff 3 For SNAP Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub values a OUI OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier is value in format of xx xx xx where each pair xx in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from Ox00 Oxff b PID If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000 the protocol ID is the Ethernet type EtherType field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP if the OUI is an OUI for a particular organization the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization to the protocol running User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 269 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm on top of SNAP In other words if value of OUI field is 00 00 00 then value of PID will be etype Ox0600 Oxffff and if value of OUI is other than 00 00 00 then valid value of PID will be any value from 0x0000 to Oxffff Group Name A valid Group Name is a unique 16 character long string for every entry which consists of a combination of alphabets a z or A Z and integers 0 9 NOTE special character and underscore _ are not allowed Buttons Auto refresh Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 270 WWW VvIVvoTeEK comMm 4 14 2 2 Group to VLAN This page shows you t
330. want to auto refresh then you need to evoke the Auto refresh 3 Click Refresh to refresh the port statistics or clear all information when you click Clear Figure 4 3 1 The Port Statistics Overview Port Statistics Overview Home Traffic Overview Auto refresh C EJ z Port Statistics Overview Packets Bytes Errors Drops Filtered Port Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received Transmitted Received 1 54957 37982 7885873 16487451 0 0 0 0 4448 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 26 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Parameter description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 191 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm transmissions per port Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion e Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding Buttons Auto refresh E Ea Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page Clear Clears the counters for all ports User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 192 WWW VvIvoTeEK comMm 4 3 2 Qos Stati
331. will be lost Upper right icon Refresh You can click them for refresh the Port Security information by manual Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 68 WWW VvIvoTekK comMm 3 5 2 2 NAS The section describes to configure the NAS parameters of the switch The NAS server can be employed to connect users to a variety of resources including Internet access conference calls printing documents on shared printers or by simply logging on to the Internet Web Interface To configure a Network Access Server in the web interface Select Enabled in the Mode of Netwrok Access Server Configuration Checked Reauthentication Enabled Set Reauthentication Period Default is 3600 seconds Set EAPOL Timeout Default is 30 seconds Set Aging Peroid Default is 300 seconds Set Hold Time Default is 10 seconds Checked RADIUS Assigned QoS Enabled Checked RADIUS Assigned VLAN Enabled Checked Guest VLAN Enabled 10 Specify Guest VLAN ID 11 Specify Max Reauth Count 12 Checked Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen 13 Click Apply Ce ee ee Figure 3 5 2 2 The Network Access Server Configuration System Configuration Mode Disabled W Reauthentication Enabled C Reauthentication Period 3600 seconds EAPOL Timeout 30 seconds Aging Period 300 seconds Hold Time 10 seconds RADIUS Assigned Q
332. will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors CDP Aware User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 119 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Select CDP awareness The CDP operation is restricted to decoding incoming CDP frames The switch doesn t transmit CDP frames CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors table are decoded All other TLVs are discarded Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames are not shown in the LLDP statistics CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors table as shown below CDP TLV Device ID is mapped to the LLDP Chassis ID field CDP TLV Address is mapped to the LLDP Management Address field The CDP address TLV can contain multiple addresses but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors table CDP TLV Port ID is mapped to the LLDP Port ID field CDP TLV Version and Platform is mapped to the LLDP System Description field Both the CDP and LLDP support system capabilities but the CDP capabilities cover capabilities that are not part of the LLDP These capabilities are shown as others in the LLDP neighbors table If all p
333. wn Port y Enable Y Shutdown Port M Enable M Shutdown Port Enable Y Shutdown Port M Enable Y Shutdown Port v Enable w User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 101 WWW VvVvIVOoOTEeEK com Parameter description Enable Loop Protection Controls whether loop protections is enabled as a whole Transmission Time The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port valid values are 1 to 10 seconds Shutdown Time The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is detected and the port action shuts down the port Valid values are 0 to 604800 seconds 7 days A value of zero will keep a port disabled until next device restart Port No The switch port number of the port Enable Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port e Action Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port Valid values are Shutdown Port Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only Tx Mode Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU s or whether it is just passively looking for looped PDU s Buttons Apply Click to save changes Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values NOTE The PoE Switch default had enabled the STP Spanning Tree Protocol if you want to enable the Loop Protection in the same PoE Switch you must disable the STP function first Click Switch gt C
334. xes are unchecked Buttons Auto refresh _ e Static Auto refresh Check this box to refresh the page automatically Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds Refresh Click to refresh the page User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 212 WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm Switch Diagnostics This chapter provides a set of basic system diagnosis It let users know that whether the system is health or needs to be fixed The basic system check includes ICMP Ping Link OAM ICMPv6 and VeriPHY Cable Diagnostics 5 1 Ping This section allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues Web Interface To configure an ICMP PING Configuration in the web interface 1 Specify ICMP PING IP Address 2 Specify ICMP PING Size 3 Click Start Figure 5 1 The ICMP Ping ICMP Ping Home gt Diagnostics gt Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ping Length 56 Ping Count Ping Interval Parameter description IP Address To set the IP Address of device what you want to ping it Ping Length The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes Ping Count The count of the ICMP packet Values range from 1 time to 60 times Ping Interval The interval of the ICMP packet Values range from 0 second to 30 seconds Egress Interface Only for I Pv6 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 273 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com The VLAN ID VID of the specific egress IPv6 interface which IC
335. y manual User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 78 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com 3 5 2 3 2 Rate Limiters The section describes how to configure the switch s ACL Rate Limiter parameters The Rate Limiter Level from 1 to 16 that allow user to set rate limiter value and units with pps or kbps Web Interface To configure ACL Rate Limiter in the web interface Click Configuration ACL then Rate Limiter To specific the Rate field and the range from O to 3276700 To scroll the Unit with pps or kbps Click the Apply to save the setting If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button It will revert to previously saved values ie ce Figure 3 5 2 3 2 The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Home Rate Limiters Rate Limiter ID Rate Unit 13 14 13 16 2 wi lt Parameter description Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row Rate The allowed values are 0 3276700 in pps or 0 100 200 300 1000000 in kbps Unit Specify the rate unit The allowed values are pps packets per second kbps Kbits per second Buttons Apply Click to save changes User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 19 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Reset Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values 3 5 2 3 3 Access Control List The section describes how to configure Access Control List rule An
336. y possible network loops Designated oe d Root ge l Designated Root iii w f Designated Port Xx hpa E a D Bridge Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the Root Bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Maximum Age the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid network topology 3 8 1 Bridge Setting The section describes that how to configure the Spanning Tree Bridge and STP System settings It allows you to configure STP System settings are used by all STP Bridge instance in the switch Web Interface To configure the Spanning Tree Bridge Settings parameters in the web interface 1 Click Configuration Spanning Tree Bridge Settings 2 Scroll to select the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank field in Basic Settings 3 Evoke to enable or disable the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank field in Advanced settings Click the apply to save the setting lf you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button It will revert to previously saved values o gt User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 103 WWW VvIvoTrTekK comMm Figure 3 8 1 The STP Bridge Configuration STP Bridge Configurati
337. ystem User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 184 4 1 2 IP Status This page displays the status of the IP protocol layer The status is defined by the IP interfaces the IP routes and the neighbour cache ARP cache status Web Interface WWW VvIvVvoTeEK comMm To display the log configuration in the web interface 1 Click Monitor System and IP Status 2 Display the IP address information Figure 4 1 2 The IP Status IP Interfaces Auto refresh C Ea IP Interfaces Interface OS lo OS lo OS lo OS lo VLAN1 VLAN1 VLAN1 VLAN4096 IP Routes Network 0 0 0 0 0 127 0 0 1 32 192 168 1 0 24 11 128 Type LINK IPv4 IPv6 IPv6 LINK IPv4 IPv6 LINK Neighbour cache IP Address 192 168 1 100 fe80 2 240 c7ff fe01 203 Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 127 0 0 1 8 11 128 fe80 1 1 64 00 40 c7 01 02 03 192 168 1 1 24 fe80 2 240 c7ff fe01 203 64 00 40 c7 01 02 03 Gateway 192 168 1 254 127 0 0 1 VLAN1 User Manual rev 1 2 Aug 2015 Home lonito Systen IP Status Status lt UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MULTICAST gt lt UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST gt lt BROADCAST MULTICAST gt Status lt UP GATEWAY HW_RT gt lt UP HOST gt lt UP HW_RT gt lt UP HOST gt Link Address VLAN1 3c 97 0e 16 eb 7e VLAN1 00 40 c7 01 02 03 185 WWW VvVvIVOoOTeEK com Parameter description IP Interfaces Interface Show the name of the interface Type Show the address type of the

User Manual - Parallels Plesk Panel

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents